2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M

Transcription

1 2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M In Brief Instrument Panel Initial Drive Information Vehicle Features Performance and Maintenance Keys, Doors, and Windows Keys and Locks Doors Vehicle Security Exterior Mirrors Interior Mirrors Windows Roof Seats and Restraints Head Restraints Front Seats Rear Seats Safety Belts Airbag System Child Restraints Storage Storage Compartments Additional Storage Features Roof Rack System Instruments and Controls Controls Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators Information Displays Vehicle Messages Vehicle Personalization Universal Remote System Lighting Exterior Lighting Interior Lighting Lighting Features Infotainment System Introduction Radio Audio Players Phone Trademarks and License Agreements Climate Controls Climate Control Systems Air Vents Maintenance Driving and Operating Driving Information Starting and Operating Engine Exhaust Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission Drive Systems Brakes Ride Control Systems Cruise Control Driver Assistance Systems Fuel Towing Conversions and Add-Ons

2 2013 Cadillac ATS Owner Manual M Vehicle Care General Information Vehicle Checks Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Electrical System Wheels and Tires Jump Starting Towing Appearance Care Service and Maintenance General Information Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Special Application Services Additional Maintenance and Care Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Maintenance Records Technical Data Vehicle Identification Vehicle Data Customer Information Customer Information Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy OnStar OnStar Overview OnStar Services OnStar Additional Information Index i-1

3 Introduction iii The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model names, and vehicle body designs appearing in this manual including, but not limited to, GM, the GM logo, the CADILLAC Crest and Wreath, and CADILLAC ATS are trademarks and/or service marks of General Motors LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors. This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name General Motors of Canada Limited for Cadillac Motor Car Division wherever it appears in this manual. Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference. Canadian Vehicle Owners Propriétaires Canadiens A French language manual can be obtained from your dealer, at or from: On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse savant: Helm, Incorporated Attention: Customer Service Halyard Drive Plymouth, MI Litho in U.S.A. Part No B Second Printing 2012 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

4 iv Introduction Using this Manual To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. Danger, Warnings, and Cautions Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them. Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death. { WARNING These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Notice: This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage. This would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means Do Not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen. Symbols The vehicle has components and labels that use symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation or information relating to a specific component, control, message, gauge, or indicator. M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your owner manual for additional instructions or information. * : This symbol is shown when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions or information.

5 Introduction v Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the Index. 9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Air Conditioning G : Air Conditioning Refrigerant Oil! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar $ : Brake System Warning Light I : Certified Technician " : Charging System I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Exterior Lamps H : Flammable. : Fuel Gauge + : Fuses 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ( : Heated Steering Wheel j : LATCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure O : Power / : Remote Vehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak M : Windshield Washer Fluid

6 vi Introduction 2 NOTES

7 In Brief Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview Initial Drive Information Initial Drive Information Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Remote Vehicle Start Door Locks Trunk Windows Seat Adjustment Memory Features Second Row Seats Heated Seats Head Restraint Adjustment Safety Belts Passenger Sensing System Mirror Adjustment Steering Wheel Adjustment Interior Lighting Exterior Lighting Windshield Wiper/Washer Climate Controls Transmission Vehicle Features Radio(s) Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices Bluetooth Steering Wheel Controls Cruise Control Infotainment System Driver Information Center (DIC) Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) In Brief 1-1 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) Ultrasonic Parking Assist Active Emergency Braking System Power Outlets Universal Remote System Sunroof Performance and Maintenance Traction Control System (TCS) StabiliTrak System Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Engine Oil Life System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Driving for Better Fuel Economy Roadside Service OnStar

8 1-2 In Brief Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview

9 In Brief Air Vents on page Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and Lane-Change Signals on page Cruise Control on page Adaptive Cruise Control on page 9 42 (If Equipped). Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System on page 9 55 (If Equipped). Heated Steering Wheel on page 5 3. Steering Wheel Controls on page Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. Driver Information Center (DIC) Display. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page Steering Wheel Controls on page Windshield Wiper/Washer on page Infotainment Display. Infotainment System. See the infotainment manual. 8. Light Sensor. See Automatic Headlamp System on page Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base) on page 8 1 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel) on page Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page Hood Release (Out of View). See Hood on page Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out of View). See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page Parking Assist Button. See Driver Assistance Systems on page Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page Tap Shift Controls (If Equipped). See Manual Mode on page Electric Parking Brake (If Equipped, Automatic Transmission). See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 5 29 (If Equipped). 17. Steering Wheel Adjustment on page Horn on page Engine START/STOP Button. See Ignition Positions on page Heated Front Seats on page 3 8 (If Equipped). 21. Storage Bin. See Instrument Panel Storage on page Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission on page 9 25 or Manual Transmission on page 9 28 (If Equipped).

10 1-4 In Brief 23. Traction Control System (TCS) on page StabiliTrak System on page Electric Parking Brake (If Equipped, Manual Transmission). See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page MODE Button. See Driver Mode Control on page Instrument Panel Storage on page Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 6. Initial Drive Information This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System The RKE transmitter may be used to lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. Q : Press to lock all doors. K : Press to unlock the driver door or all doors, depending on the vehicle personalization settings. See Vehicle Personalization on page L : Press and release one time to initiate vehicle locator. Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. Press L again or start the vehicle to cancel the panic alarm. : Press and hold until the trunk begins to move to open the trunk. Press the key release button near the bottom of the transmitter to remove the key. The key can be used for the driver door and the glove box.

11 In Brief 1-5 See Keys on page 2 2 and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. Remote Vehicle Start With this feature the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle. Starting the Vehicle 1. Press and release Q on the RKE transmitter. 2. Immediately press and hold / for at least two seconds or until the turn signal lamps flash. 3. Press the brake pedal and select the ON/RUN/START ignition mode to drive the vehicle. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on. The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can be extended only once. Canceling a Remote Start To cancel a remote start, do any of the following:. Press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.. Turn the vehicle on and then off. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 9. Door Locks To lock or unlock a door manually:. From the outside, if the vehicle is equipped with keyless access, press the button on the door handle and pull the handle when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is within range. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page Use the key in the front doors. The key cylinder is covered by a cap. See Door Locks on page From the inside, to lock a rear door push down on the door lock knob on top of the door. To unlock a door, pull once on the door handle to unlock it, and again to open it.

12 1-6 In Brief Power Door Locks From the outside, press Q or K on the RKE transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. Trunk Windows From the inside, press Q or K. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when activated. See Power Door Locks on page To open the trunk, press from inside the vehicle or on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or push the touch pad on the rear of the trunk above the license plate. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3 and Trunk on page The power windows only operate with the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 9 21.

13 The power window switches on the driver door control all the windows. Each passenger door has a switch that controls only that window. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to raise it. See Power Windows on page Seat Adjustment Power Seats In Brief 1-7 See Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 3. Lumbar Adjustment To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.. Raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.. If available, raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. To adjust the lumbar and bolster support:. Press and hold the control forward or rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support.. Press and hold the control up or down to increase or decrease seatback bolster support, if available.

14 1-8 In Brief See Lumbar Adjustment on page 3 4. Reclining Seatbacks Memory Features Second Row Seats On some models, the rear seatbacks can be folded down to increase cargo space. See Rear Seats on page 3 9. Heated Seats To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward to raise. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 5. If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and B (Exit) buttons on the driver door are used to manually save and recall memory settings for the driver seat and outside mirrors. See Memory Seats on page 3 6 and Vehicle Personalization on page Uplevel Buttons Shown, Base Buttons Similar If available, the buttons are near the climate controls on the center stack. To operate, the ignition must be in ON/RUN/START.

15 Press M /J or L /z to heat the driver or passenger seat cushion and seatback. Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes. See Heated Front Seats on page 3 8. Head Restraint Adjustment Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. To achieve a comfortable seating position, change the seatback recline angle as little as necessary while keeping the seat and the head restraint height in the proper position. See Head Restraints on page 3 2 and Power Seat Adjustment on page 3 3. Safety Belts In Brief 1-9 Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page Lap-Shoulder Belt on page Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 41.

16 1-10 In Brief Passenger Sensing System United States Canada and Mexico The passenger sensing system will turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System on page The passenger airbag status indicator lights on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page Mirror Adjustment Exterior Mirrors 1. Move the selector switch to L (Left) or R (Right) to choose the driver or passenger mirror. 2. Press one of the four arrows to move the mirror. 3. Move the selector switch to ) to deselect the mirror. The vehicle has manual folding mirrors. See Folding Mirrors on page Interior Mirrors Adjustment Hold the rearview mirror in the center and move it to view the area behind the vehicle. Manual Rearview Mirror For vehicles with a manual rearview mirror, push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use to avoid glare from the headlamps from behind. See Manual Rearview Mirror on page Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror For vehicles with an automatic dimming rearview mirror, the mirror will automatically reduce the glare from the headlamps from behind.

17 In Brief 1-11 The dimming feature comes on when the vehicle is started. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page Steering Wheel Adjustment 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Interior Lighting Dome Lamp The dome lamp is in the overhead console. DOOR: The lamp comes on when a door is opened. ON: Turns the lamp on. Reading Lamps There are reading lamps on the overhead console and over the rear passenger doors. These lamps come on when any door is opened. To manually turn the reading lamps on or off: To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down. 3. Pull or push the steering wheel closer or away from you. To change the dome lamp settings, press the following: OFF: Turns the lamp off, even when a door is open. Press m or n next to each overhead console reading lamp.

18 1-12 In Brief Press the lamp lens to turn the rear passenger reading lamps on or off. For more information on interior lighting, see Instrument Panel Illumination Control on page 6 7. Exterior Lighting The exterior lamp control is on the end of the turn and lane change lever. There are four positions: O : Turns off the exterior lamps. The knob returns to the AUTO position after it is released. Turn to O again to reactivate the AUTO mode. In Canada, the headlamps will automatically reactivate when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) on automatic transmission vehicles, and when the parking brake is released on manual transmission vehicles. AUTO: Automatically turns the exterior lamps on and off, depending on outside lighting. ; : Turns on the parking lamps, together with the sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license plate lamps, and instrument panel lights. 5 : Turns on the headlamps, together with the parking lamps, sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license plate lamps, and instrument panel lights. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1 and Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 6 4. Windshield Wiper/Washer With the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the lever to select the wiper speed. HI: Use for fast wipes. LO: Use for slow wipes.

19 In Brief 1-13 INT: Move the lever up to INT for intermittent wipes, then turn the x INT band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. 8 : For a single wipe, briefly move the lever down. For several wipes, hold the lever down. n L : Pull the lever toward you to spray windshield washer fluid and activate the wipers. See Windshield Wiper/Washer on page 5 4. Climate Controls For vehicles with one of these systems, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation. Base 1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls 2. Fan Control 3. AUTO (Automatic Operation) 4. Air Delivery Mode Control 5. OFF (Fan) 6. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature) 7. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped) 8. AC (Air Conditioning) 9. Defrost 10. Rear Window Defogger 11. Recirculation

20 1-14 In Brief 1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls 2. Fan Control 3. OFF (Fan) 4. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped) 5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) Uplevel 6. Defrost 7. Rear Window Defogger 8. Recirculation See Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base) on page 8 1 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel) on page 8 5. Transmission Automatic Transmission Driver Shift Control (DSC) or Tap Shift Vehicles equipped with DSC allow shifting an automatic transmission similar to a manual transmission. DSC can be enabled through the shift lever, or the tap shift controls on the back of the steering wheel (if equipped). See Manual Mode on page 9 26.

21 Vehicle Features Radio(s) O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume. RADIO: Press to choose between FM, AM, and SiriusXM, if equipped. { : Press to go to the Home Page. MENU: Press to select a menu. MEDIA: Press to change the audio source between CD, USB, SD Card, and AUX. 7 : Press to seek the previous station or track. 6 : Press to seek the next station or track. See Overview on page 7 3 about these and other radio features. Favorites Favorites can be stored including radio stations and media. To display the favorites page, press the FAV button on the radio faceplate. Continue pressing the FAV button to toggle through the remaining visible favorite pages. See Manage Favorites under Home Page on page 7 4. Setting the Clock See Clock (Base Radio) on page 5 6 or Clock (Uplevel Radio) on page 5 6. Satellite Radio Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM satellite radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming. In Brief 1-15 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service SiriusXM is a satellite radio service based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound. A fee is required to receive the SiriusXM service. For more information refer to:. or call (U.S.).. or call (Canada). See Satellite Radio on page 7 11.

22 1-16 In Brief Portable Audio Devices This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB port in the center console under the armrest and in the center stack storage bin. External devices such as ipods, laptop computers, MP3 players, CD changers, and USB storage devices may be connected, depending on the audio system. See Auxiliary Jack on page 7 20 and USB Port on page Bluetooth The Bluetooth system allows users with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone to make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle audio system and controls. The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions. See Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 7 23 or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on page 7 27 or Bluetooth (Overview) on page Steering Wheel Controls For vehicles with audio steering wheel controls, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. g : Press to talk or interact with OnStar and Bluetooth. See OnStar Overview on page 14 1 and Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 7 23 or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on page 7 27 or Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7 21.

23 In Brief 1-17 c : Press to decline an incoming call, or end a current call. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system. S or T : Press the five-way control to the left or right to go to the previous or next area in the display or to the previous or next menu. y or z : Press the five-way control up or down to go up or down in a list. Press to go up or down a page. SEL: Press to select a highlighted menu item. C or B : Press to go to the next or previous favorite when listening to the radio. Press to go to the next or previous track when listening to a media source. x + or x : Press to increase or decrease the volume. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 2. Cruise Control J : Press to turn the system on and off. A white cruise control indicator appears in the instrument cluster when cruise is turned on.

24 1-18 In Brief +RES: Press the control up briefly to resume to a previously set speed or to increase vehicle speed if the cruise control is already activated. To increase speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press +RES up to the first detent. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press +RES up to the second detent. SET : Press the control down briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control or to decrease vehicle speed if the cruise control is already activated. To decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET down to the first detent. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press SET down to the second detent. * : Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. See Cruise Control on page 9 39 or Adaptive Cruise Control on page 9 42 (if equipped). Infotainment System See the infotainment manual for information on the radio, audio players, phone, navigation system, and voice or speech recognition. There is also information on settings and downloadable applications (if equipped). Driver Information Center (DIC) The DIC display is in the instrument cluster. It shows the status of many vehicle systems. y or z : Press to move up or down in a list. S or T : Press to move between the interactive display zones in the cluster. Press S to go back to the previous menu. SEL: Press to open a menu or select a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 5 26.

25 Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System FCA is intended to help avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. FCA provides a green indicator when a vehicle is detected directly ahead. It provides a flashing visual alert and pulses the driver seat, or beeps, when approaching a vehicle directly ahead too quickly. FCA also provides a visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System on page Lane Departure Warning (LDW) LDW is intended to help avoid unintentional lane departures at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or greater. LDW uses a camera sensor to detect the lane markings. The LDW appears green if a lane marking is detected. If the vehicle departs the lane, the indicator will change to amber and flash. In addition, the driver seat will pulse or beeps will sound. See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) If available, SBZA will alert the driver to vehicles in the vehicle's side blind zone. When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone, the SBZA display will light up in the corresponding outside side mirror and will flash if the turn signal is on. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page Rear Vision Camera (RVC) RVC displays a view of the area behind the vehicle, on the center stack display, when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). In Brief 1-19 See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing on page Ultrasonic Parking Assist URPA uses sensors on the rear bumper to assist with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPA may display a warning triangle on the Rear Vision Camera screen and a graphic on the instrument cluster to provide the object distance. In addition, multiple beeps or pulses may occur if very close to an object. The vehicle may also have the Front Parking Assist system, a higher speed Backing Warning System, and the Rear Automatic Braking system. See Driver Assistance Systems on page 9 50.

26 1-20 In Brief Active Emergency Braking System If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) it also has the Active Emergency Braking System, which includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) and the Automatic Collision Preparation (ACP) System. These systems can provide a boost to braking or automatically brake the vehicle to help avoid crashes. See Active Emergency Braking System on page Power Outlets The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player. The vehicle has two accessory power outlets:. Inside the front storage bin below the climate control system.. On the rear of the center floor console. Lift the cover to access the accessory power outlet. See Power Outlets on page 5 7. Universal Remote System This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices.

27 In Brief 1-21 Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Remote system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist you with programming the Universal Remote system. See Universal Remote System on page Sunroof For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to operate the sunroof. See Ignition Positions on page 9 16 and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page SLIDE Switch 2. TILT Switch Open/Close: Press the rear or front of the switch (1) to the first detent and hold to open or close the sunroof. Express Open/Express Close: Press the rear or front of the switch (1) to the second detent and release to express open or express close the sunroof. Vent Feature: Press the rear of the switch (2) and release to express open the vent. Press the front of the switch (2) and release to express close the vent. Manually open the sunshade. See Sunroof on page 2 23.

28 1-22 In Brief Performance and Maintenance Traction Control System (TCS) The traction control system limits wheel spin. The system is on when the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press and release g on the center console. i illuminates in the instrument cluster.. Press and release g again to turn traction control back on. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page StabiliTrak System The StabiliTrak system assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. The system is on when the vehicle is started.. To turn off both Traction Control and StabiliTrak, press and hold g until g and i illuminate in the instrument cluster.. Press g again to turn on both systems. See StabiliTrak System on page Tire Pressure Monitor This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The low tire pressure warning light alerts to a significant loss in pressure of one of the vehicle's tires. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page The warning light will remain on until the tire pressure is corrected.

29 In Brief 1-23 The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This may be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure. The TPMS does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance. Maintain the correct tire pressures. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit This vehicle may have a tire sealant and compressor kit that can be used to seal small punctures in the tread area of the tire. Significant sidewall damage will require the tire to be replaced. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page for complete operating information. Engine Oil Life System The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and displays the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message when it is time to change the engine oil and filter. The oil life system should be reset to 100% only following an oil change. Resetting the Oil Life System 1. Using the DIC controls on the right side of the steering wheel, display REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page When remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See Engine Oil Messages on page Press SEL on the DIC controls and hold SEL down for a few seconds to clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message and reset the oil life at 100%. Be careful not to reset the oil life display accidentally at any time other than after the oil is changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. The oil life system can also be reset as follows: 1. Turn the ignition on with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message is not on, the system is reset. See Engine Oil Life System on page

30 1-24 In Brief Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Vehicles with a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.. When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control.. Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require.. Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.. Combine several trips into a single trip.. Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near the size.. Follow recommended scheduled maintenance. Roadside Service U.S.: Canada: TTY Users (U.S. Only): Mexico: New vehicles are automatically enrolled in the Roadside Service program. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page OnStar If equipped, this vehicle has a comprehensive, in-vehicle system that can connect to a live Advisor for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Connection, and Diagnostic Services. See OnStar Overview on page 14 1.

31 Keys, Doors, and Windows Keys and Locks Keys Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation Remote Vehicle Start Door Locks Power Door Locks Delayed Locking Automatic Door Locks Lockout Protection Safety Locks Doors Trunk Vehicle Security Vehicle Security Vehicle Alarm System Immobilizer Immobilizer Operation Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors Power Mirrors Folding Mirrors Heated Mirrors Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1 Windows Windows Power Windows Sun Visors Roof Sunroof

32 2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows Keys and Locks Keys { WARNING Leaving children in a vehicle with a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous and children or others could be seriously injured or killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the RKE transmitter in the vehicle, and children or others could be caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave children in a vehicle with an RKE transmitter. This key, inside the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, is used for the driver door and glove box. To remove the key, press the button near the bottom of the transmitter, and pull the key out. Never pull the key out without pressing the button. See your dealer if a new key is needed. Contact Roadside Service if locked out of the vehicle. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page With an active OnStar subscription, an OnStar Advisor may remotely unlock the vehicle. See OnStar Overview on page 14 1.

33 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System See Radio Frequency Statement on page for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range:. Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle.. Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal.. Check the transmitter's battery. See Battery Replacement later in this section.. If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation The RKE transmitter functions may work up to 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. Keep in mind that other conditions, such as those previously stated, can impact the performance of the transmitter. With Remote Start and Remote Trunk Release Shown, Without Similar Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. The turn signal indicators may flash and/or the horn may sound to indicate locking. See Remote Locking, Unlocking, Starting under Vehicle Personalization on page 5 43.

34 2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows If the driver door is open when Q is pressed and Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out is enabled through the vehicle personalization, all doors will lock and then the driver door will immediately unlock. See Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out under Vehicle Personalization on page If the passenger door is open when Q is pressed, all doors lock. Pressing Q may also arm the theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle Alarm System on page K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door or all doors. When remotely unlocking the vehicle at night, the headlamps and back-up lamps will come on for about 30 seconds to light your approach to the vehicle. The turn signal indicators may flash to indicate unlocking. Memory seat positions may be recalled when unlocking the vehicle. See Remote Locking, Unlocking, Starting under Vehicle Personalization on page Pressing K will disarm the theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle Alarm System on page / (Remote Start): For vehicles with this feature, press and release Q and then immediately press and hold / for at least two seconds to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 9. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release one time to initiate vehicle locator. The exterior lamps flash and the horn chirps three times. Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn sounds and the turn signal lamps flash for 30 seconds, or until L is pressed again or the vehicle is started. (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold until the trunk begins to move to open the power trunk. Keyless Access Operation Some vehicles have the keyless access system that lets you lock and unlock the doors and access the trunk without removing the RKE transmitter from your pocket, purse, briefcase, etc. The RKE transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the door being opened. If the vehicle has this feature, there will be a button on the outside door handles. The keyless access system can be programmed to unlock all doors on the first lock/unlock press from the driver door. See Vehicle Personalization on page 5 43.

35 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5 Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Driver Door When the doors are locked and the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on the driver door handle will unlock the driver door. If the lock/unlock button is pressed again within five seconds, all passenger doors will unlock. Driver Door Shown, Passenger Similar Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:. It has been more than five seconds since the first lock/ unlock button press.. Two lock/unlock button presses were used to unlock all doors.. Any vehicle door has opened and all doors are now closed. Keyless Unlocking/Locking from the Passenger Doors When the doors are locked and the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft) of the door handle, pressing the lock/unlock button on a passenger door handle will unlock all doors. Pressing the lock/unlock button will cause all doors to lock if any of the following occur:. The lock/unlock button was used to unlock all doors.. Any vehicle door has opened and all doors are now closed. Passive Locking If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this feature allows you to select the doors to automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When the vehicle is turned off and all doors are closed, the vehicle will determine how many RKE transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least one RKE transmitter has been removed from the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock after eight seconds. Temporarily disable the locking feature by pressing and holding the K switch on the door for several seconds with a door open. Passive locking will then remain disabled until the door Q switch is pressed, or until the vehicle is turned on. To customize the doors to automatically lock when exiting the vehicle, see Remote Locking, Unlocking, Starting under Vehicle Personalization on page 5 43.

36 2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows Keyless Trunk Opening Press the touch pad on the trunk handle to open the trunk if the RKE transmitter is within 1 m (3 ft). Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer. The vehicle can be reprogrammed so that lost or stolen transmitters no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters matched to it. Programming with a Recognized Transmitter (Keyless Access Vehicles Only) A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle when there is one recognized transmitter. To program, the vehicle must be off and all transmitters, both currently recognized and new, must be with you. 1. Place the recognized transmitter(s) in the cupholder. 2. Remove the key lock cylinder cap. See Door Locks on page Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder on the driver door handle, then turn the key counterclockwise to the unlock position five times within 10 seconds. The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays READY TO LEARN ELECTRONIC KEY #2, 3, 4, ETC. 3. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter pocket. The center console storage area will need to be opened to access the transmitter pocket.

37 Keys, Doors, and Windows Press the ENGINE START/ STOP button. When the transmitter is learned, the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next transmitter. 5. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press K or Q on the transmitter. To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 3 5. When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold the START/STOP button for approximately 12 seconds to exit programming mode. Programming without a Recognized Transmitter (Keyless Access Vehicles Only) If there are no currently recognized transmitters available, follow this procedure to program up to eight transmitters. This feature is not available in Canada. This procedure will take approximately 30 minutes to complete. The vehicle must be off and all transmitters to be programmed must be with you. 1. Remove the key lock cylinder cap. See Door Locks on page Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder on the driver door handle, then turn the key counterclockwise to the unlock position five times within 10 seconds. The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays REMOTE LEARN PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. 2. Wait for 10 minutes until the DIC displays PRESS ENGINE START BUTTON TO LEARN and then press the ENGINE START/STOP button. The DIC display will again show REMOTE LEARN PENDING, PLEASE WAIT. 3. Repeat Step 2 two additional times. After the third time all previously known transmitters will no longer work with the vehicle. Remaining transmitters can be relearned during the next steps. The DIC display should now show READY FOR REMOTE # Place the new transmitter in the transmitter pocket. The center console storage area will need to be opened to access the transmitter pocket.

38 2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows 5. Press the START/STOP button. When the transmitter is learned, the DIC display will show that it is ready to program the next transmitter. 6. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket and press K or Q on the transmitter. To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 4 6. When all additional transmitters are programmed, press and hold the START/STOP button for approximately 12 seconds to exit programming mode. Starting the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Battery If the transmitter battery is weak or if there is interference with the signal, the DIC may display a message when you try to start the vehicle. See Key and Lock Messages on page To start the vehicle: 1. Open the center console storage area and the storage tray. 2. Place the transmitter in the transmitter pocket. 3. With the vehicle in P (Park), N (Neutral) or, Neutral, press the brake pedal and the ENGINE START/STOP button. Replace the transmitter battery as soon as possible. Battery Replacement Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from your body could damage the transmitter. Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. 1. Press the button near the bottom of the transmitter and pull the key out.

39 Keys, Doors, and Windows Use the oval base of the key blade to separate the two halves of the transmitter. 3. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. 4. Insert the new battery on the back housing, positive side facing down. Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery. 5. Align the key release button and snap the transmitter back together. Remote Vehicle Start If available, this feature allows the engine to be started from outside the vehicle. / (Remote Vehicle Start): This button will be on the RKE transmitter if the vehicle has remote start. The climate control system will use the previous settings during a remote start. The rear window defogger may come on during remote start based on cold ambient conditions. The rear defog indicator light does not come on during remote start. Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws may require a person using remote start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements.

40 2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows If your vehicle is low on fuel, do not use the remote start feature. The vehicle may run out of fuel. The RKE transmitter range may be less while the vehicle is running. Other conditions can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 2 3. Starting the Engine Using Remote Start 1. Press and release Q on the RKE transmitter. 2. Immediately press and hold / for at least two seconds or until the turn signal lamps flash. This confirms the request to remote start the vehicle has been received. If the vehicle's lamps are not visible, press and hold / for at least two seconds. During the remote start, the doors will be locked and the parking lamps will remain on as long as the engine is running. The engine will shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension is done or the ignition is put in ON/RUN/START. 3. Press the brake pedal and select the ON/RUN/START ignition mode to drive the vehicle. Extending Engine Run Time For a 10-minute extension, repeat Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is still running. The remote start can only be extended once. When the remote start is extended, the second 10-minute period will start immediately. For example, if the vehicle has been running for five minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes. A maximum of two remote starts, or a remote start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The vehicle's ignition must be changed to ON/RUN/START and then back to OFF before the remote start procedure can be used again. Canceling a Remote Start To cancel a remote start, do any of the following:. Press and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.. Turn the vehicle on and then back off.

41 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11 Conditions in Which Remote Start Will Not Work The remote start will not operate if any of the following occur:. The ignition is in any mode other than OFF.. The transmitter is in the vehicle.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers are on.. There is an emission control system malfunction.. The engine coolant temperature is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts have already been used.. The vehicle is not in P (Park). Door Locks { WARNING Unlocked doors can be dangerous.. Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven.. Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent (Continued) WARNING (Continued) injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it.. Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop the vehicle. Locking the doors can help prevent this from happening.. From the outside, if the vehicle is equipped with keyless access, press the button on the door handle and pull the handle when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is within range. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page From the inside, to lock a rear door push down on the door lock knob on top of the door. To unlock a door, pull once on the door handle to unlock it, and again to open it.

42 2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows. Use the key in the front doors. The key cylinder is covered by a cap. 1. Door Handle 2. Cap 3. Slot 4. Key To access the key cylinder: 1. Pull the door handle (1) to the open position. 2. Insert the key (4) into the slot (3) on the bottom of the cap (2) and pry outward. 3. Move the cap (2) rearward. 4. Use the key (4) in the cylinder. To replace the cap: 1. Insert the two tabs at the back of the cap (2) between the black seal and the metal base. 2. Pull the door handle (1) to the open position. 3. Move the cap (2) forward and press to snap the cap into place. 4. Release the door handle (1). Power Door Locks Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when activated. K (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.

43 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13 Delayed Locking This feature delays the actual locking of the doors. When Q is pressed on the power door lock switch, while the door is open, a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed locking is active. When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened before five seconds have elapsed, the five-second timer will reset once all the doors are closed again. Press Q on the door lock switch again or press Q on the RKE transmitter to override this feature and lock the doors immediately. This feature can also be programmed. See Vehicle Personalization on page Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is moved out of P (Park). The doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is moved into P (Park). Use the manual or power door locks to unlock the doors if someone needs to exit, and to lock the doors again. The power door locks can be programmed through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Vehicle Personalization on page Lockout Protection If the vehicle is in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter in the vehicle and the power door lock switch is pressed with the driver door open, all the doors will lock and only the driver door will unlock. If the vehicle is off with the RKE transmitter in the vehicle and the power door lock switch is pressed with the driver door open, all the doors will lock and only the driver door will unlock after closing all of the doors. This feature can be manually overridden with the driver door open by pressing and holding Q on the power door lock switch. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out When this feature is on and door locking is requested with the driver door open, all doors will lock and only the driver door will unlock. The driver door must be closed before locking is requested for all doors to remain locked. When this feature is off, the Delayed Door Lock menu will be available.

44 2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows This feature can also be programmed. See Vehicle Personalization on page Safety Locks The rear door safety locks prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. Press v { to activate the safety locks on the rear doors. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when activated. The rear door power windows are also disabled. See Power Windows on page Press v { again to deactivate the lockout switch. If an inside rear door handle is being pulled when the safety lock is deactivated, that door will remain locked and the indicator light may flash. Release the handle, then press the safety lock twice to deactivate the safety locks. Doors Trunk { WARNING Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate or trunk/hatch open:. Close all of the windows.. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. (Continued)

45 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15 WARNING (Continued). Adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control Systems in the Index.. If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate, disable the power liftgate function. See Engine Exhaust on page Trunk Lock Release To open the trunk, press from inside the vehicle or on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or push the touch pad on the rear of the trunk above the license plate. With the keyless access system, if the vehicle is locked, the RKE transmitter must be within 1 m (3 ft) of the trunk for it to be recognized; then the trunk can be opened by the touch pad on the rear of the trunk above the license plate. If the vehicle is ever without power, the trunk area can still be accessed. Through the rear seat pass-through door, if equipped: 1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the pass-through door. See Rear Seat Pass-Through Door on page Reach inward through the opening to locate the emergency trunk release handle. See Emergency Trunk Release Handle following. 3. Pull the release handle toward the front of the vehicle to open the trunk. By folding the rear seat, if equipped: 1. Fold down the rear seatback. See Rear Seats on page Reach inward through the opening to locate the emergency trunk release handle. 3. Pull the release handle toward the front of the vehicle to open the trunk.

46 2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows Emergency Trunk Release Handle The emergency trunk release handle is only intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling them to open the trunk from the inside. There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release handle on the trunk lid. This handle will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release handle to open the trunk from the inside. Vehicle Security This vehicle has theft-deterrent features; however, they do not make the vehicle impossible to steal. Vehicle Alarm System This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm system. Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing items in the trunk as it could damage the handle. The indicator light, on the instrument panel near the windshield, indicates the status of the system. In addition to standard theft-deterrent system capabilities, this system may also have a power sounder, and inclination sensor.

47 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17 When equipped with the optional security package, the alarm can also be triggered by a change in vehicle position, such as if the vehicle is lifted, or by an interruption of the vehicle's power supply. The power sounder has an internal battery. If the vehicle loses battery power when the theft-deterrent system is armed, the power sounder will activate automatically. Arming the System 1. Close all doors, the trunk, and the hood. 2. Lock the vehicle using the transmitter or the power door lock switch. The indicator light on the instrument panel should come on and stay on for about 30 seconds. 3. After 30 seconds, or after Q is pressed again, the alarm system will arm, and the indicator light will begin to slowly flash indicating the alarm is operating. If a door, the hood, or trunk is opened without first unlocking with the transmitter, the turn signals will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds. The alarm system will then re-arm to monitor for the next unauthorized event. The theft-deterrent alarm system will not activate if the doors are locked with the key. Disarming the System To disarm the system, either unlock the doors using the transmitter, or start the vehicle with a recognized transmitter in the vehicle. To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:. Lock the vehicle with the transmitter after all occupants have left the vehicle and all doors are closed.. Always unlock a door with the transmitter. Unlocking the driver door with the key will not disarm the alarm. If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by pressing K on the transmitter, or start the vehicle with a recognized transmitter in the vehicle. The alarm will not stop if you unlock the driver door with the key. How to Detect a Tamper Condition If K is pressed and the horn chirps three times, the alarm was activated while the system was armed. If the alarm has been activated, a message will appear on the DIC. See Security Messages on page Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement on page for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

48 2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows Immobilizer Operation This vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system. The system does not have to be manually armed or disarmed. The vehicle is automatically immobilized when the vehicle is turned off. The immobilization system is disarmed when the pushbutton start is activated to enter the ACC/ ACCESSORY mode or the ON/ RUN/START mode and a valid transmitter is present in the vehicle. The security light, in the instrument cluster, comes on if there is a problem with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system. The system has one or more RKE transmitters matched to an immobilizer control unit in the vehicle. Only a correctly matched RKE transmitter will start the vehicle. If the transmitter is ever damaged, you may not be able to start your vehicle. When trying to start the vehicle, the security light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on. If the engine does not start and the security light stays on, there is a problem with the system. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the vehicle will not change ignition modes (ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN/START, OFF), and the RKE transmitter appears to be undamaged, try another transmitter. Or, you may try placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket located in the center console. See NO REMOTE DETECTED under Key and Lock Messages on page If the ignition modes will not change with the other transmitter, your vehicle needs service. If the ignition does change modes, the first transmitter may be faulty. See your dealer who can service the theft-deterrent system and have a new RKE transmitter programmed to the vehicle. It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or replacement RKE transmitters. Up to eight transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle. To program additional transmitters, see Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. Do not leave the key or device that disarms or deactivates the theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

49 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19 Exterior Mirrors Convex Mirrors { CAUTION A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes. The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the driver seat. Power Mirrors 1. Move the selector switch to L (Left) or R (Right) to choose the driver or passenger mirror. 2. Press one of the four arrows to move the mirror. 3. Move the selector switch to ) to deselect the mirror. Exterior Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped, there is a driver side exterior automatic dimming mirror that will automatically adjust for the glare of headlamps behind. Memory Mirrors If equipped, there are exterior memory mirrors. See Memory Seats on page 3 6. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) If equipped, there is Side Blind Zone Alert. See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page Turn Signal Indicator If equipped, there are turn signal indicators on the mirror housings. The indicator will flash when a turn signal or the hazard warning flashers are used.

50 2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows Folding Mirrors Manual Folding Mirrors The mirrors can be folded inward toward the vehicle to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. Push the mirror outward to return it to the original position. Heated Mirrors = (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors. See Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base) on page 8 1 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel) on page 8 5. Interior Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror To avoid the glare of the headlamps from behind, push the tab forward for daytime and pull it rearward for nighttime use. Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror If equipped, the automatic dimming rearview mirror will automatically reduce the glare of the headlamps from behind. The dimming feature comes on each time the vehicle is started. Cleaning the Mirror Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water. Windows { WARNING Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke.

51 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-21 The vehicle aerodynamics are designed to improve fuel economy performance. This may result in a pulsing sound when either rear window is down and the front windows are up. To reduce the sound, open either a front window or the sunroof, if equipped. Power Windows { WARNING Children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Never leave the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat, use the window lockout switch to prevent operation of the windows. See Keys on page 2 2. The power windows only operate with the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page The power window switches on the driver door control all the windows. Each passenger door has a switch that controls only that window. Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up to raise it. Express-Down/Up Windows Windows with the express feature allow the windows to be raised and lowered all the way without holding the switch. Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate the express feature. The express mode can be canceled by briefly pressing or pulling the switch. Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature If any object is in the path of the window when the express-up is active, the window will stop at the obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position. Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to normal operation after the obstruction or condition is removed.

52 2-22 Keys, Doors, and Windows Express Window Anti-Pinch Override { WARNING If express override is activated, the window will not reverse automatically. You or others could be injured and the window could be damaged. Before you use express override, make sure that all people and obstructions are clear of the window path. The anti-pinch feature can be overridden when the ignition is in ON/RUN/START. Hold the window switch all the way up to the second position. The window will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the switch is released, the express mode is reactivated. In this mode, the window can close on an object in its path. Use care when using the override mode. Programming the Power Windows If the vehicle battery has been recharged or disconnected, or is not working, the front power windows may need to be reprogrammed for the express-up feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or recharge the vehicle battery. To program: 1. With the ignition in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or when RAP is active, close all doors. 2. Press down the power window switch until the window is fully open. 3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is fully closed. 4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately two seconds after the window is completely closed. The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process for the other windows. Window Lockout This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating, except from the driver position. Press v { to activate the window lockout. The indicator light in the switch will illuminate when activated.

53 Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-23 The rear door safety locks are also disabled. See Safety Locks on page Press v { again to deactivate the lockout switch. If the indicator light flashes, the feature may not be working properly. Sun Visors Pull the visor toward you, or move it to the side to help reduce glare. To use the lighted mirror, lift the cover. Roof Sunroof For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, the ignition must be in ON/ RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained Accessory Power (RAP), to operate the sunroof. See Ignition Positions on page 9 16 and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page SLIDE Switch 2. TILT Switch Open/Close: Press the rear or front of the switch (1) to the first detent and hold to open or close the sunroof. Express Open/Express Close: Press the rear or front of the switch (1) to the second detent and release to express open or express close the sunroof. Vent Feature: Press the rear of the switch (2) and release to express open the vent. Press the front of the switch (2) and release to express close the vent. Manually open the sunshade. Anti-Pinch Feature If an object is in the path of the sunroof when it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof then retracts away from the object.

54 2-24 Keys, Doors, and Windows Dirt and debris may collect on the sunroof seal or in the track. This could cause an issue with sunroof operation or noise. It could also plug the water drainage system. Periodically open the sunroof and remove any obstacles or loose debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and roof sealing area using a clean cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not remove grease from the sunroof.

55 Seats and Restraints Head Restraints Head Restraints Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment Thigh Support Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks Memory Seats Heated Front Seats Rear Seats Rear Seats Rear Seat Pass-Through Door Safety Belts Safety Belts How to Wear Safety Belts Properly Lap-Shoulder Belt Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety Belt Extender Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash Airbag System Airbag System Where Are the Airbags? When Should an Airbag Inflate? What Makes an Airbag Inflate? How Does an Airbag Restrain? What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? Passenger Sensing System Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Seats and Restraints 3-1 Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash Child Restraints Older Children Infants and Young Children Child Restraint Systems Where to Put the Restraint Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash Securing Child Restraints (Front Passenger Seat) Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat)

56 3-2 Seats and Restraints Head Restraints { WARNING With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/ spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. Front Seats The vehicle's front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. To lower the head restraint, press the button located on the side of the head restraint, push the head restraint down, and release the button. Pull and push on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place. The head restraints can be adjusted forward or rearward. To adjust the head restraint forward, grasp the head restraint and pull it forward to the desired locking position. To adjust the head restraint rearward, press the button located on the side

57 of the head restraint and move the head restraint rearward until the desired locking position is reached. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The front seat outboard head restraints are not designed to be removed. Rear Seats The vehicle's rear seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. The height of the head restraint can be adjusted. Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Try to move the head restraint to make sure that it is locked in place. To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the head restraint down. Try to move the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Rear outboard head restraints are not designed to be removed. Seats and Restraints 3-3 Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment { WARNING You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a driver seat while the vehicle is moving. Adjust the driver seat only when the vehicle is not moving.

58 3-4 Seats and Restraints To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward.. Raise or lower the seat by moving the rear of the control up or down.. If available, raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. To adjust the seatback, see Reclining Seatbacks on page 3 5. To adjust the lumbar support, see Lumbar Adjustment on page 3 4. Some vehicles are equipped with a feature that activates a vibrating pulse alert in the driver seat to help the driver avoid crashes. See Driver Assistance Systems on page Lumbar Adjustment To adjust the lumbar and bolster support:. Press and hold the control forward or rearward to increase or decrease lumbar support.. Press and hold the control up or down to increase or decrease seatback bolster support, if available. Thigh Support Adjustment If available, adjust the manual leg extension by pulling up on the lever, and then pulling or pushing on the support to lengthen or shorten it. Release the lever to lock it in place.

59 Reclining Seatbacks To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward to raise. { WARNING Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly. Seats and Restraints 3-5 Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is moving.

60 3-6 Seats and Restraints Memory Seats If equipped, the "1," "2," SET, and B (Exit) buttons on the driver door are used to manually save and recall memory settings for the driver seat and outside mirrors. Storing Memory Positions To save positions to the 1 and 2 buttons: 1. Adjust the driver seat and outside mirrors to the desired driving positions. 2. Press and hold SET and 1 at the same time until a beep sounds. 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for a second driver using 2. To save positions to the B (Exit) button and Easy Exit features: 1. Adjust the driver seat and outside mirrors to the desired positions for getting out of the vehicle. 2. Press and hold SET and B at the same time until a beep sounds. Manually Recalling Memory Positions Press and hold "1," "2," or B to manually recall the previously stored memory positions. Releasing "1, "2," or B before the stored positions are reached stops the recall. There is also the ability to press and release 1, 2, or B to manually recall the previously stored memory positions. The ignition must be in ON/RUN/START, and the transmission must be in P (Park) (parking brake is set for a manual transmission). Placing the ignition in OFF before the stored positions are reached stops the recall. If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction; then press and hold the appropriate manual control for the memory item that is not recalling for two seconds. Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the appropriate memory button. If the memory position is still not recalling, see your dealer for service.

61 Recalling RKE Memory Positions (Auto Memory Recall) The Auto (Automatic) Memory Recall feature automatically recalls the current driver s previously stored 1 or 2 position when entering the vehicle. Depending upon the Auto Memory Recall feature enabled in the vehicle personalization menu, memory 1 or 2 positions are recalled in the following ways: To activate the recall when On - Driver Door Open is selected in the vehicle personalization menu:. On vehicles with RKE, press K on the RKE transmitter and open the door.. On vehicles with keyless access, press the lock/unlock button on the outside driver door handle and open the driver door. The RKE transmitter must be present for the recall to activate.. If the driver door is already open, press K on the RKE transmitter to activate the recall. To activate the recall when On - At Ignition On is selected in the vehicle personalization menu:. Place the ignition in ON/RUN/ START. See Vehicle Personalization on page To stop recall movement, press one of the memory, power mirror, or power seat controls. If On - At Ignition On is selected in the vehicle personalization menu, placing the ignition in OFF also stops the recall. If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling a memory position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction; then press and hold the appropriate manual control for the memory item that is not recalling for two seconds. Seats and Restraints 3-7 Try recalling the memory position again by opening the driver door and pressing K on the RKE transmitter. If the memory position is still not recalling, see your dealer for service. Easy Exit Recall If programmed on in the vehicle personalization menu, the Easy Exit feature automatically moves the driver seat and outside mirrors to the memory positions saved to the B (Exit) button. See Storing Memory Positions listed previously. See also Vehicle Personalization on page Easy Exit recall automatically activates when one of the following occurs:. The vehicle is turned off and the driver door is opened within a short time.. The vehicle is turned off with the driver door open.

62 3-8 Seats and Restraints If something has blocked the driver seat while recalling the exit position, the recall may stop. Remove the obstruction; then press and hold the appropriate manual control for the exit feature not recalling for two seconds. Try recalling the exit position again. If the exit position is still not recalling, see your dealer for service. Heated Front Seats { WARNING If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to the skin, the seat heater may cause burns. To reduce the risk of burns, people with such a condition should use care when using the seat heater, especially for long periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat, such as a blanket, cushion, cover, or similar item. This may (Continued) WARNING (Continued) cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat heater may cause a burn or may damage the seat. Uplevel Buttons Shown, Base Buttons Similar If available, the buttons are near the climate controls on the center stack. To operate, the ignition must be in ON/RUN/START. Press M /J or L /z to heat the driver or passenger seat cushion and seatback. Press the button once for the highest setting. With each press of the button, the seat will change to the next lower setting, and then to the off setting. The indicator lights next to the buttons indicate three for the highest setting and one for the lowest. If the heated seats are on high, the level may automatically be lowered after approximately 30 minutes. When this feature is off, the heated seat symbol on the button is white. When the heated seat is turned on, the symbol turns red. The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.

63 Remote Start Heated Seats When it is cold outside, the heated seats can be turned on automatically during a remote start. They are canceled when the ignition is turned on. Press the button to use the heated seats after the vehicle is started. The heated seat indicator lights do not turn on during a remote start. The temperature performance of an unoccupied seat may be reduced. This is normal. The heated seats will not turn on during a remote start unless they are enabled in the vehicle personalization menu. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 9 and Vehicle Personalization on page Rear Seats Folding the Seatback On some vehicles, either side of the seatback can be folded for more cargo space. Fold a seatback only when the vehicle is not moving. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Seats and Restraints 3-9 To fold the seatback: 1. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle, and let the belt retract.

64 3-10 Seats and Restraints 2. Pull the lever on top of the seatback toward you to unlock the seatback. A red tab near the seatback lever raises when the seatback is unlocked. 3. Fold the seatback forward. Repeat Steps 2 3 to fold the other seatback, if desired. Raising the Seatback { WARNING If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. { WARNING A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. To raise a seatback: 1. Lift the seatback up. Make sure the center safety belt and latch do not get trapped behind the seat. Push the seatback rearward to lock it in place. A red tab near the seatback lever retracts when the seatback is locked in place. 2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to be sure it is locked into position. 3. Reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do not let the belt twist. 4. Pull on the center safety belt to make sure the mini-latch is secure. 5. Repeat the steps to raise the other seatback, if necessary. When the seat is not in use, it should be kept in the upright, locked position.

65 Rear Seat Pass-Through Door Some vehicles have a rear seat pass-through door in the center of the rear seatback. Fold down the center armrest and pull the latch to open the door. Safety Belts This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some things not to do with safety belts. { WARNING Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, injuries can be much worse than if you are wearing safety belts. You can be seriously injured or killed by hitting things inside the vehicle harder or by being ejected from the vehicle. In addition, anyone who is not buckled up can strike other passengers in the vehicle. (Continued) Seats and Restraints 3-11 WARNING (Continued) It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, passengers riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow passengers to ride in any area of the vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Always wear a safety belt, and check that all passenger(s) are restrained properly too. This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 5 13.

66 3-12 Seats and Restraints Why Safety Belts Work When riding in a vehicle, you travel as fast as the vehicle does. If the vehicle stops suddenly, you keep going until something stops you. It could be the windshield, the instrument panel, or the safety belts! When you wear a safety belt, you and the vehicle slow down together. There is more time to stop because you stop over a longer distance and, when worn properly, your strongest bones take the forces from the safety belts. That is why wearing safety belts makes such good sense. Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. Your chance of being conscious during and after a crash, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. Also, in nearly all states and in all Canadian provinces, the law requires wearing safety belts. How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size. There are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 3 33 or Infants and Young Children on page Follow those rules for everyone's protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

67 Seats and Restraints 3-13 There are important things to know about wearing a safety belt properly.. Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you.. Always use the correct buckle for your seating position.. Wear the lap part of the belt low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.. Wear the shoulder belt over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash. { WARNING You can be seriously injured, or even killed, by not wearing your safety belt properly.. Never allow the lap or shoulder belt to become loose or twisted.. Never wear the shoulder belt under both arms or behind your back.. Never route the lap or shoulder belt over an armrest. Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear center seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see Folding the Seatback under Rear Seats on page 3 9 for instructions on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see Seats in the Index.

68 3-14 Seats and Restraints 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly. If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

69 Seats and Restraints 3-15 To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle. Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, on vehicles with side impact and roof-rail airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, the pretensioners and possibly other parts of the safety belt system will need to be replaced. See Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash on page Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides This vehicle may have rear safety belt comfort guides. If not, they are available through your dealer. The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown booster seats and for some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck and head. There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the rear seat. To install a comfort guide to the safety belt: 1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat.

70 3-16 Seats and Restraints WARNING (Continued) and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. { WARNING A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder (Continued) 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is on the shoulder and not falling off of it. The belt should be close to, but not contacting, the neck.

71 Seats and Restraints 3-17 To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Store the guide in its storage pocket on the side of the seatback. Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. See the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.

72 3-18 Seats and Restraints Safety System Check Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Safety Belt Care on page Safety Belt Care Keep belts clean and dry. { WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water. Replacing Safety Belt System Parts after a Crash { WARNING A crash can damage the safety belt system in the vehicle. A damaged safety belt system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the safety belt systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible.

73 After a minor crash, replacement of safety belts may not be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the safety belt system was not being used at the time of the crash. Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the vehicle has been in a crash, or if the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the front outboard passenger.. A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver.. A roof-rail airbag for the front outboard passenger and the passenger seated directly behind the front outboard passenger. Seats and Restraints 3-19 The vehicle may have the following airbags:. Seat-mounted side impact airbags for the second row outboard passengers. All vehicle airbags have the word AIRBAG on the trim or on a label near the deployment opening. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the center of the steering wheel for the driver and on the instrument panel for the front outboard passenger. For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the lower part of the instrument panel. For seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the side of the seatback closest to the door. For roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

74 3-20 Seats and Restraints Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { WARNING You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt, even with airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to inflate in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are the only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce the chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are supplemental restraints to the safety belts. Everyone in the vehicle should wear a safety belt properly, whether or not there is an airbag for that person. { WARNING Because airbags inflate with great force and faster than the blink of an eye, anyone who is up against, or very close to any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to any airbag, as you would be if sitting on the edge of the seat or leaning forward. Safety belts help keep (Continued) WARNING (Continued) you in position before and during a crash. Always wear a safety belt, even with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door or side windows in seating positions with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags. { WARNING Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. (Continued)

75 Seats and Restraints 3-21 WARNING (Continued) Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in the vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 3 33 or Infants and Young Children on page There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page Where Are the Airbags? The driver frontal airbag is in the center of the steering wheel. The front outboard passenger frontal airbag is in the passenger side instrument panel.

76 3-22 Seats and Restraints The driver knee airbag is below the steering column. The front outboard passenger knee airbag is below the glove box. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and front outboard passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door. The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar On vehicles with second row seat-mounted side impact airbags, they are in the sides of the rear seatback closest to the door.

77 { WARNING If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag. Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or window opening. If you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked. When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries, mainly to the driver's or front outboard passenger's head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether the frontal airbags will or should inflate is not based primarily on how fast the vehicle is traveling. It depends on what is hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows down. Seats and Restraints 3-23 Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds depending on whether the vehicle hits an object straight on or at an angle, and whether the object is fixed or moving, rigid or deformable, narrow or wide. Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design. Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many side impacts. In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity. Frontal knee airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal impacts that exceed a predetermined deployment threshold.

78 3-24 Seats and Restraints The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. The passenger seat position sensor and the passenger safety belt buckle provide information that is used to determine if the passenger knee airbag should deploy. The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact airbags and roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes depending on the location of the impact. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near frontal impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact airbag is intended to inflate on the side of the vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will inflate when either side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over on its side, or in a severe frontal impact. In any particular crash, no one can say whether an airbag should have inflated simply because of the vehicle damage or repair costs. What Makes an Airbag Inflate? In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module. For airbag location, see Where Are the Airbags? on page How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.

79 Seats and Restraints 3-25 Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts by distributing the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant's body. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the first and second rows. The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events, although no system can prevent all such ejections. But airbags would not help in many types of collisions, primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page Airbags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts. What Will You See after an Airbag Inflates? After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they inflate. Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? on page The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle. { WARNING When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate.

80 3-26 Seats and Restraints You can lock the doors, and turn off the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features. { WARNING A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle. Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a crash has occurred. In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the front outboard passenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include airbag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.. The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic module which records information after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page and Event Data Recorders on page Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag system will not work properly. See your dealer for service.

81 Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will light on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. United States Canada and Mexico The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page The passenger sensing system turns off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, under certain conditions. No other airbag is affected by the passenger sensing system. The passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front outboard passenger seat. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag should be allowed to inflate or not. Seats and Restraints 3-27 According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly secured in a rear seat in a correct child restraint for their weight and size. We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag inflates.

82 3-28 Seats and Restraints { WARNING A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger airbag(s), no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not inflate under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger airbag and knee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an infant is present in a child restraint.. A front outboard passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time.. There is a critical problem with the airbag system or the passenger sensing system. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbags are off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front outboard passenger seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit as a reminder that the airbags are active.

83 Seats and Restraints 3-29 For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, depending upon the person s seating posture and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt properly whether or not there is an airbag for that person. { WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 14 for more information, including important safety information. If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. 3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing Child Restraints (Front Passenger Seat) on page 3 47 or Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat) on page If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page Restart the vehicle. The passenger sensing system may or may not turn off the airbags for a child in a child restraint depending upon the child's seating posture and body build. It is better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.

84 3-30 Seats and Restraints If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an Adult-Size Occupant If a person of adult size is sitting in the front outboard passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. Use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, seat massagers, a laptop, or other electronic devices. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. 5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit. Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See Safety Belts and Child Restraints in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well the passenger sensing system operates. We recommend that you not use seat covers or other aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 31 for more information about modifications that can affect how the system operates. A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger sensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system may turn off the passenger frontal airbag and passenger knee airbag when liquid is soaked into the seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be

85 Seats and Restraints 3-31 lit, and the airbag readiness light on the instrument cluster will also be lit.. Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in may make it more likely that the passenger sensing system will turn on the passenger frontal airbag and passenger knee airbag while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat. If the passenger frontal airbag and passenger knee airbag are turned on, the on indicator will be lit. If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 14 for important safety information. The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is not desired, remove the object from the seat. { WARNING Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or between the passenger seat cushion and seatback may interfere with the proper operation of the passenger sensing system. Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page { WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so. Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end, or side sheet metal, may keep the airbag system from working properly.

86 3-32 Seats and Restraints The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing or moving any parts of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side impact sensors, or airbag wiring. Your dealer and the service manual have information about the location of the airbag sensors, sensing and diagnostic module, and airbag wiring. In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the front outboard passenger position, which includes sensors that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing system may not operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced with non-gm covers, upholstery, or trim; or with GM covers, upholstery, or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort-enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page The vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels on page If your vehicle needs to be modified because you have a disability and you have questions about whether the modifications will affect the vehicle's airbag system, or if you have questions about whether the airbag system will be affected if the vehicle is modified for any other reason, call Customer Assistance. See Customer Assistance Offices (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 4 or Customer Assistance Offices (Mexico) on page Airbag System Check The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light on page Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened, or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the location of the airbags, see Where Are the Airbags? on page See your dealer for service.

87 Replacing Airbag System Parts after a Crash { WARNING A crash can damage the airbag systems in the vehicle. A damaged airbag system may not work properly and may not protect you and your passenger(s) in a crash, resulting in serious injury or even death. To help make sure the airbag systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag system parts. See your dealer for service. If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on when you are driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page Seats and Restraints 3-33 Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle safety belts.

88 3-34 Seats and Restraints The manufacturer instructions that come with the booster seat state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page If the shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.. Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips, touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat.. Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts properly. { WARNING Never allow more than one child to wear the same safety belt. The safety belt cannot properly spread the impact forces. In a crash, they can be crushed together and seriously injured. A safety belt must be used by only one person at a time.

89 Seats and Restraints 3-35 { WARNING Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap (Continued) WARNING (Continued) belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts.

90 3-36 Seats and Restraints Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. { WARNING Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a (Continued) WARNING (Continued) person's arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint. { WARNING Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing (Continued) WARNING (Continued) child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.

91 Seats and Restraints 3-37 Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer instructions that come with the restraint state the weight and height limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition, there are many kinds of restraints available for children with special needs. { WARNING To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during a crash, infants need complete support. In a crash, if an infant is in a rear-facing child restraint, the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of an infant's body, the back and shoulders. Infants should always be secured in rear-facing child restraints. { WARNING A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints.

92 3-38 Seats and Restraints Child Restraint Systems Rear-Facing Infant Seat A rear-facing infant seat provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. Forward-Facing Child Seat A forward-facing child seat provides restraint for the child's body with the harness. Booster Seats A booster seat is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.

93 Seats and Restraints 3-39 Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle { WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page Children can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it. In some areas of the United States and Canada, Certified Child Passenger Safety Technicians (CPSTs) are available to inspect and demonstrate how to correctly use and install child restraints. In the U.S., refer to the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) website to locate the nearest child safety seat inspection station. For CPST availability in Canada, check with Transport Canada or the Provincial Ministry of Transportation office. Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint { WARNING A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Secure the child properly following the instructions that came with that child restraint. Where to Put the Restraint According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position.

94 3-40 Seats and Restraints We recommend that children and child restraints be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using safety belts. Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great if the airbag deploys. { WARNING A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front (Continued) WARNING (Continued) passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though it is turned off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 27 for additional information. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. Child restraints and booster seats vary considerably in size, and some may fit in certain seating positions better than others. Always make sure the child restraint is properly secured. Depending on where you place the child restraint and the size of the child restraint, you may not be able to access adjacent safety belt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additional passengers or child restraints. Adjacent seating positions should not be used if the child restraint prevents access to or interferes with the routing of the safety belt. Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.

95 Seats and Restraints 3-41 Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle even when no child is in it. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) The LATCH system secures a child restraint during driving or in a crash. LATCH attachments on the child restraint are used to attach the child restraint to the anchors in the vehicle. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, and also the instructions in this manual. When installing a child restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed using only the top tether and anchor. In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its attachments. The following explains how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle. Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors and attachments. Lower Anchors Lower anchors (1) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (2).

96 3-42 Seats and Restraints Top Tether Anchor A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (2) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. The child restraint may have a single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Either will have a single attachment (2) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations Rear Seat I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. H (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors.

97 Seats and Restraints 3-43 To assist in locating the lower anchors, each seating position with lower anchors has two labels, near the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. To assist in locating the top tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is on the cover. The outboard lower anchors are behind the vertical openings in the seat trim. The top tether anchors are behind the rear seat, on the filler panel. Open the covers to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached.

98 3-44 Seats and Restraints According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 3 39 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { WARNING If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type child restraint properly using the anchors, or use the vehicle safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with the child restraint and the instructions in this manual. { WARNING Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor. { WARNING Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out (Continued) WARNING (Continued) of the retractor to set the lock, if the vehicle has one, after the child restraint has been installed. Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub against the vehicle s safety belts. This may damage these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments. Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its stowed position, before folding the seat. If you need to secure more than one child restraint in the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restraint on page 3 39.

99 Seats and Restraints 3-45 This system is designed to make the installation of child restraints easier. When using lower anchors, do not use the vehicle's safety belts. Instead, use the vehicle's anchors and child restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top tether. 1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual Find the lower anchors for the desired seating position Put the child restraint on the seat Attach and tighten the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors. 2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor Open the top tether anchor cover to expose the anchor Route, attach, and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions: If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback.

100 3-46 Seats and Restraints If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and around the headrest or head restraint posts. 3. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the LATCH path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. There should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement for proper installation.

101 Replacing LATCH System Parts After a Crash { WARNING A crash can damage the LATCH system in the vehicle. A damaged LATCH system may not properly secure the child restraint, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure the LATCH system is working properly after a crash, see your dealer to have the system inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being used during a crash, new LATCH system parts may be needed. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the LATCH system was not being used at the time of the crash. Securing Child Restraints (Front Passenger Seat) This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 27 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. Seats and Restraints 3-47 { WARNING A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the passenger frontal airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger airbag(s), no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not inflate under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag(s) are off. (Continued)

102 3-48 Seats and Restraints WARNING (Continued) Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off. If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in the front outboard passenger seat, always move the seat as far back as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 41 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 41 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat rearward as far back as it will go and raise the seat upward as far up as it will go, before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

103 Seats and Restraints Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 5 and Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see If the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child Restraint under Passenger Sensing System on page To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.

104 3-50 Seats and Restraints Securing Child Restraints (Rear Seat) When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 41 for how and where to install the child restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 41 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system, you will be using the safety belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say. If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page Put the child restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, check if the correct buckle is being used. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.

105 Seats and Restraints Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When the retractor lock is set, the belt can be tightened but not pulled out of the retractor. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is locked. If the retractor is not locked, repeat Steps 4 and If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on page 3 41 for more information. 7. Before placing a child in the child restraint, make sure it is securely held in place. To check, grasp the child restraint at the safety belt path and attempt to move it side to side and back and forth. When the child restraint is properly installed, there should be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.

106 3-52 Seats and Restraints 2 NOTES

107 Storage Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage Glove Box Armrest Storage Additional Storage Features Cargo Tie-Downs Roof Rack System Roof Rack System Storage Compartments Instrument Panel Storage To access, push on the cover and release. There is an accessory power outlet inside. See Power Outlets on page 5 7. Storage 4-1 If equipped, there may also be storage behind the climate control system. Touch the bottom of the climate control system panel until the door automatically starts to open. The storage area may contain a USB port, SD card reader and auxiliary jack. See USB Port on page 7 16, SD Card Reader on page 7 19, and Auxiliary Jack on page 7 20 for the base model radio and the infotainment manual for the uplevel model radio.

108 4-2 Storage Keep the storage area closed when not in use. Touch the bottom of the climate control system panel again until the door automatically starts to close. Glove Box To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use the key to lock and unlock it. The glove box may have a compact disc player inside. Armrest Storage Front Armrest Push the button and lift to access the storage area. The storage area may contain a USB port, SD card reader and auxiliary jack. See USB Port on page 7 16, SD Card Reader on page 7 19, and Auxiliary Jack on page 7 20 for the base model radio and the infotainment manual for the uplevel model radio. Rear Armrest Pull the armrest down and lift the cover to access the storage area.

109 Additional Storage Features Cargo Tie-Downs The cargo tie-downs can be used to secure small loads inside the trunk. Roof Rack System { WARNING If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack like paneling, plywood, or a mattress the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM certified accessory carrier. For vehicles with a roof rack, the rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory. See your dealer for additional information. Storage 4-3 Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs more than 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails, making sure to fasten cargo securely. To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the vehicle s center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking, or abrupt maneuvers; otherwise it may result in loss of control. If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the cargo remains in its place. Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 11.

110 4-4 Storage 2 NOTES

111 Instruments and Controls 5-1 Instruments and Controls Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment Steering Wheel Controls Heated Steering Wheel Horn Windshield Wiper/Washer Compass Clock (Base Radio) Clock (Uplevel Radio) Power Outlets Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators Instrument Cluster Speedometer Odometer Trip Odometer Tachometer Fuel Gauge Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Safety Belt Reminders Airbag Readiness Light Passenger Airbag Status Indicator Charging System Light Malfunction Indicator Lamp Brake System Warning Light Parking Brake Light Service Electric Parking Brake Light Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light Vehicle Ahead Indicator Traction Off Light StabiliTrak OFF Light Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light Tire Pressure Light Engine Oil Pressure Light Low Fuel Warning Light Security Light High-Beam On Light Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) Light Lamps On Reminder Cruise Control Light Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) Head-Up Display (HUD) Vehicle Messages Vehicle Messages Battery Voltage and Charging Messages Brake System Messages Compass Messages Cruise Control Messages Door Ajar Messages Engine Cooling System Messages Engine Oil Messages Engine Power Messages Fuel System Messages Key and Lock Messages Lamp Messages Object Detection System Messages Ride Control System Messages

112 5-2 Instruments and Controls Airbag System Messages Security Messages Service Vehicle Messages Starting the Vehicle Messages Tire Messages Transmission Messages Vehicle Reminder Messages Vehicle Speed Messages Washer Fluid Messages Vehicle Personalization Vehicle Personalization Universal Remote System Universal Remote System Universal Remote System Programming Universal Remote System Operation Controls Steering Wheel Adjustment To adjust the steering wheel: 1. Pull the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel up or down. 3. Pull or push the steering wheel closer or away from you. 4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Steering Wheel Controls For vehicles with audio steering wheel controls, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel.

113 Instruments and Controls 5-3 g (Push to Talk): Press to talk or interact with OnStar and Bluetooth. See OnStar Overview on page 14 1 and Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 7 23 or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on page 7 27 or Bluetooth (Overview) on page c (End Call): Press to decline an incoming call, or end a current call. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system. S or T (Previous or Next): Press the five-way control to the left or right to go to the previous or next area in the display or to the previous or next menu. y or z (Next or Previous): Press the five-way control up or down to go up or down in a list. Press to go up or down a page. SEL (Select): Press to select a highlighted menu option. C or B (Next or Previous Favorite): Press to go to the next or previous favorite when listening to the radio. Press to go to the next or previous track when listening to a media source. x + or x (Volume): Press to increase or decrease the volume. Heated Steering Wheel ( (Heated Steering Wheel): Press to turn the heated steering wheel on or off. A light on the button displays when the feature is turned on. The steering wheel takes about three minutes to be fully heated.

114 5-4 Instruments and Controls Horn Press a on the steering wheel pad to sound the horn. Windshield Wiper/Washer With the ignition in ACC/ ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiper lever to select the wiper speed. HI: Use for fast wipes. LO: Use for slow wipes. INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move the lever up to INT for intermittent wipes, then turn the x INT band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. 8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly move the wiper lever down. For several wipes, hold the wiper lever down. Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and windshield before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged blades should be replaced. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. Wiper Parking If the ignition is put in OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they will immediately stop. If the windshield wiper lever is then moved to OFF before the driver door is opened or within 10 minutes, the wipers will restart and move to the base of the windshield. If the ignition is put in OFF while the wipers are performing wipes due to windshield washing, the wipers continue to run until they reach the base of the windshield. Rainsense For vehicles with Rainsense, a sensor near the top center of the windshield detects the amount of water on the windshield and controls the frequency of the windshield wiper. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.

115 Instruments and Controls 5-5 INT (Rainsense Wipe Sensitivity Control): Move the windshield wiper lever to INT. Turn the x INT band on the wiper lever to adjust the sensitivity.. Turn the band up for more sensitivity to moisture.. Turn the band down for less sensitivity to moisture.. Move the windshield wiper lever out of the INT position to deactivate Rainsense. Wiper Arm Assembly Protection When using an automatic car wash, move the windshield wiper lever to OFF. This disables the automatic Rainsense windshield wipers. With Rainsense, if the transmission is in N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is very slow, the wipers will automatically stop at the base of the windshield. The wiper operations return to normal when the transmission is no longer in N (Neutral) or the vehicle speed has increased. n L (Windshield Washer): Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to spray windshield washer fluid and activate the wipers. The wipers will continue until the lever is released or the maximum wash time is reached. When the windshield wiper lever is released, additional wipes may occur depending on how long the windshield washer had been activated. See Washer Fluid on page for information on filling the windshield washer fluid reservoir. { WARNING In freezing weather, do not use the washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. Compass The vehicle may have a compass display on the Driver Information Center (DIC). The compass receives its heading and other information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak, and vehicle speed information.

116 5-6 Instruments and Controls The compass system is designed to operate for a certain number of miles or degrees of turn before needing a signal from the GPS satellites. When the compass display shows CAL, drive the vehicle for a short distance in an open area where it can receive a GPS signal. The compass system will automatically determine when a GPS signal is restored and provide a heading again. See Compass Messages on page 5 34 for the messages that may be displayed for the compass. Clock (Base Radio) Setting the Time To set the time: 1. Select Settings from the Home Page and select Set Time. 2. Turn the MENU knob to increase or decrease the hour. 3. Press the MENU knob to go to the next option. Press S BACK to go to the last menu and save the changes. AUTO SET In the Set Time view, push on the area just above the chrome bar and below the "AUTO SET" screen button to turn on/off the Auto Time adjust capability. Clock (Uplevel Radio) The infotainment system controls are used to access the time and date settings through the menu system. See Home Page in the infotainment manual for information about how to use the menu system. Setting the Time To set the time: 1. From the Home Page, press the SETTINGS screen button and press Time and Date. 2. Press Set Time and press + or to increase or decrease hours, minutes, and AM or PM. Press 12Hr or 24Hr for 12 or 24 hour clock. 3. Press } to go back to the previous menu. To set the date: 1. Press the SETTINGS screen button and press Time and Date. 2. Press Set Date and press + or to increase or decrease month, day, or year. 3. Press } to go back to the previous menu.

117 Instruments and Controls 5-7 Power Outlets The accessory power outlets can be used to plug in electrical equipment, such as a cell phone or MP3 player. The vehicle has two accessory power outlets:. Inside the front storage bin below the climate control system.. On the rear of the center floor console. Lift the cover to access the accessory power outlet. Certain accessory power plugs may not be compatible with the accessory power outlet and could overload vehicle or adapter fuses. If a problem is experienced, see your dealer. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. See Add-On Electrical Equipment on page Notice: Hanging heavy equipment from the power outlet can cause damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. The power outlets are designed for accessory power plugs only, such as cell phone charge cords. Always unplug electrical equipment when not in use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum 20 amps rating.

118 5-8 Instruments and Controls Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gauges could prevent injury. Warning lights come on when there could be a problem with a vehicle function. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. Gauges can indicate when there could be a problem with a vehicle function. Often gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there may be a problem, check the section that explains what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.

119 Instruments and Controls 5-9 Instrument Cluster English Shown, Metric Similar

120 5-10 Instruments and Controls Cluster Application Displays The cluster has three interactive display zones. Use the five-way control on the right steering wheel control to move between the different display zones and scroll through the different displays. The left and right zones display Driver Information Center (DIC) information. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page The center zone displays application information for navigation, audio, phone, or settings. Navigation If there is no active route, a compass will be displayed. If there is an active route, press SEL to end route guidance or turn the voice prompts on or off. Audio While the Audio application page is displayed, press SEL to enter the Audio menu. In the Audio menu search for music or change the audio source. Phone While the Phone application page is displayed, press SEL to enter the Phone menu. In the Phone menu, if there is no active phone call, view recent calls or scroll through contacts. If there is an active call, mute the phone or switch to handset operation. Settings Press SEL while the Settings application page is displayed to enter the Settings menu. Units: Press SEL while Units is highlighted to enter the Units menu. Choose English or metric units by pressing SEL while the desired item is highlighted. A checkmark will be displayed next to the selected item. Info Pages: Press SEL while Info Pages is highlighted to select the items to be displayed in the DIC information displays. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page Open Source Software: Press SEL while Open Source Software is highlighted to display open source software information. Speedometer The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph).

121 Instruments and Controls 5-11 Odometer The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers or miles. This vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If the vehicle needs a new cluster installed, the new odometer is set to the mileage of the old odometer. If this is not possible, it is set at zero and a label is put on the driver door to show the old mileage reading. Trip Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last reset. The trip odometer is accessed and reset through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page Tachometer The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Notice: If the engine is operated with the tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle could be damaged, and the damages would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in the shaded warning area. Fuel Gauge When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge indicates about how much fuel is left in the tank. There is an arrow near the fuel gauge pointing to the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but the vehicle should be refueled soon.

122 5-12 Instruments and Controls Here are four things that some owners ask about. None of these show a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gauge reads full.. It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to fill the tank.. The gauge moves a little while turning a corner or speeding up.. The gauge takes a few seconds to stabilize after the ignition is turned on, and goes back to empty when the ignition is turned off. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Metric English This gauge measures the temperature of the vehicle's engine. While driving under normal operating conditions, if the needle moves into the shaded area, the engine is too hot. Pull off the road, stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soon as possible.

123 Instruments and Controls 5-13 Safety Belt Reminders Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light There is a driver safety belt reminder light on the instrument cluster. When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind the driver to fasten their safety belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle may continue several times if the driver remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the driver safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light There is a passenger safety belt reminder light near the passenger airbag status indicator. See Passenger Sensing System on page When the vehicle is started, this light flashes and a chime may come on to remind passengers to fasten their safety belt. Then the light stays on solid until the belt is buckled. This cycle continues several times if the passenger remains or becomes unbuckled while the vehicle is moving. If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop, or other electronic device. To turn off the warning light and/or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt.

124 5-14 Instruments and Controls Airbag Readiness Light This light shows if there is an electrical problem with the airbag system. The system check includes the airbag sensor(s), passenger sensing system, the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring, and the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag System on page { WARNING If the airbag readiness light stays on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means the airbag system might not be working properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the vehicle serviced right away. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has a passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System on page 3 27 for important safety information. The passenger airbag status indicator is in the overhead console. The airbag readiness light comes on for several seconds when the vehicle is started. If the light does not come on then, have it fixed immediately. If there is a problem with the airbag system, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come on. See Airbag System Messages on page United States Canada and Mexico When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off for several seconds

125 Instruments and Controls 5-15 as a system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag. If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag are allowed to inflate. If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the front outboard passenger frontal airbag and knee airbag. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer for service. { WARNING If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 5 14 for more information, including important safety information. Charging System Light The charging system light comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show the light is working. It should go out when the engine is started. If the light stays on, or comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the electrical charging system. Have it checked by your dealer. Driving while this light is on could drain the battery. When this light comes on, or is flashing, the Driver Information Center (DIC) also displays a message. See Battery Voltage and Charging Messages on page If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn off all accessories, such as the radio and air conditioner.

126 5-16 Instruments and Controls Malfunction Indicator Lamp A computer system called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors the operation of the vehicle to ensure emissions are at acceptable levels, helping to maintain a clean environment. The malfunction indicator lamp comes on when the vehicle is placed in Service Only Mode, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Ignition Positions on page If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while the engine is running, this indicates that the OBD II system has detected a problem and diagnosis and service might be required. Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system also assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, the emission controls might not work as well, the vehicle fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission controls and can cause this light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This could also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/ Maintenance test. See Accessories and Modifications on page This light comes on during a malfunction in one of two ways: Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.

127 Instruments and Controls If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible. If the light continues to flash, find a safe place to stop and park the vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon as possible. Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. The following may correct an emission control system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling the Tank on page The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.. Check that good quality fuel is used. Poor fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently as designed and may cause stalling after start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up. If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the fuel brand used. It may require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off. See Recommended Fuel on page If none of the above have made the light turn off, your dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might have developed. Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Depending on where you live, your vehicle may be required to participate in an emission control system inspection and maintenance program. For the inspection, the emission system test equipment will likely connect to the vehicle's Data Link Connector (DLC). The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. See your dealer if assistance is needed.

128 5-18 Instruments and Controls The vehicle may not pass inspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is on with the engine running, or if the vehicle is placed in Service Only Mode and the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on. See your dealer for assistance in verifying proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp.. The OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if the 12-volt battery has recently been replaced or run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This can take several days of routine driving. If this has been done and the vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness, your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection. Brake System Warning Light The vehicle brake system consists of two hydraulic circuits. If one circuit is not working, the remaining circuit can still work to stop the vehicle. For normal braking performance, both circuits need to be working. If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away. Metric English This light comes on briefly when the vehicle is turned on. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If the light comes on and stays on, there is a base brake problem. { WARNING The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service.

129 Instruments and Controls 5-19 Parking Brake Light Metric English This light comes on when the parking brake is applied. If the light continues flashing after the parking brake is released, or while driving, there is a problem with the electric parking brake system or another system. A message may also display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Brake System Messages on page If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, see your dealer. Service Electric Parking Brake Light This light should come on briefly when the vehicle is in ON/RUN. If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If this light stays on, there is a problem with the electric parking brake system or another system on the vehicle that is causing the parking brake system to work at a reduced level. The vehicle can still be driven, but should be taken to a dealer as soon as possible. See the information for the electric parking brake under Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page If a message displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), see Brake System Messages on page 5 33.

130 5-20 Instruments and Controls Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light This light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If the light does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn off the vehicle. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. A chime may also sound when the light comes on steady. If the ABS light is the only light on, the vehicle has regular brakes, but the antilock brakes are not functioning. If both the ABS and the brake system warning light are on, the vehicle's antilock brakes are not functioning and there is a problem with the regular brakes. See your dealer for service. See Brake System Warning Light on page 5 18 and Brake System Messages on page Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Light If available, this light briefly comes on amber while starting the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off. This light comes on green when the system is on and ready to operate. When the system determines that the vehicle is leaving its lane without using the turn signal, this light will change to amber and flash. See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) on page Vehicle Ahead Indicator If available, this light in the Driver Information Center (DIC) displays green when a vehicle is detected ahead.

131 Instruments and Controls 5-21 This light will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System on page Traction Off Light This light and the StabiliTrak OFF light come on when StabiliTrak is turned off. If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not limited. Adjust driving accordingly. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 9 34 and StabiliTrak System on page StabiliTrak OFF Light If the TCS is off, the system does not assist in controlling the vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak systems and the warning light turns off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 9 34 and StabiliTrak System on page Traction Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak Light This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light then turns off. The traction off light comes on when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off by pressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button. This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. This light comes on when the StabiliTrak system is turned off. If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction Control System (TCS) is also off. The StabiliTrak or Traction Control System (TCS) indicator/warning light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If the light does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off.

132 5-22 Instruments and Controls If the light is on and not flashing, the TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak system have been disabled. A DIC message may display. Check the DIC messages to determine which feature(s) is no longer functioning and whether the vehicle requires service. If the indicator/warning light is on and flashing, the TCS and/or the StabiliTrak system is actively working. See StabiliTrak System on page 9 36 and Traction Control System (TCS) on page Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light This light comes on briefly while starting the vehicle. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by the dealer. If the system is working normally the indicator light goes off. Notice: The engine coolant temperature warning light indicates that the vehicle has overheated. Driving with this light on can damage the engine and it may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Engine Overheating on page The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on when the engine has overheated. If this happens, pull over and turn off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the TPMS.

133 Instruments and Controls 5-23 When the Light Is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires are significantly underinflated. A Driver Information Center (DIC) tire pressure message may also display. See Tire Messages on page Stop as soon as possible, and inflate the tires to the pressure value shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure on page When the Light Flashes First and Then Is On Steady If the light flashes for about a minute and then stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. If the problem is not corrected, the light will come on at every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page Engine Oil Pressure Light Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. Driving with the engine oil low can also damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Check the oil level as soon as possible. Add oil if required, but if the oil level is within the operating range and the oil pressure is still low, have the vehicle serviced. Always follow the maintenance schedule for changing engine oil. The oil pressure light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle could be low on oil and might have some other system problem. See your dealer. Low Fuel Warning Light This light is near the fuel gauge and comes on briefly when the ignition is turned on as a check to show it is working. It also comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. The light turns off when fuel is added. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced.

134 5-24 Instruments and Controls Security Light High-Beam On Light Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) Light The immobilizer light should come on briefly as the engine is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. If the system is working normally, the indicator light turns off. If the light stays on and the engine does not start, there could be a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Immobilizer Operation on page This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 6 4. Automatic High-Beam Light This light should come on briefly as the vehicle is started. If it does not come on, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. This light comes on solid when there is a problem with the AFL system. It flashes when the system is switching between lighting modes. See Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on page 6 5. This light comes on when the automatic high-beam headlamps are in use. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1.

135 Lamps On Reminder Cruise Control Light Instruments and Controls 5-25 Adaptive Cruise Control Light This light comes on when the exterior lamps are in use. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1. The cruise control light is white when the cruise control is on and ready, and turns green when the cruise control is set and active. See Cruise Control on page This light in the Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control (if equipped) is active. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page 9 42.

136 5-26 Instruments and Controls Information Displays Driver Information Center (DIC) The DIC displays are shown in the left and right interactive display zones on the instrument cluster. The displays show the status of many vehicle systems. The controls for the DIC are on the right steering wheel control. S or T : Press to move between the interactive display zones in the cluster. Press S to go back to the previous menu. SEL (Select): Press to open a menu or select a menu item. Press and hold to reset values on certain screens. DIC Information Display Options The information displays on the DIC can be turned on or off through the Settings menu. 1. Press SEL while viewing the Settings page in the center display zone on the cluster. 2. Scroll to Info Pages and press SEL. 3. Press y or z to move through the list of possible information displays. 4. Press SEL while an item is highlighted to select or deselect that item. When an item is selected, a checkmark will appear next to it. DIC Information Displays The following is the list of all possible DIC information displays. Some of the information displays may not be available for your particular vehicle. Speed: The digital speedometer shows the vehicle speed in either kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). Trip 1 and Trip 2: The Trip display shows the current distance traveled, in either kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since the trip odometer was last reset. The trip odometer can be reset by pressing and holding SEL while this display is active. y or z : Press to move up or down in a list.

137 Instruments and Controls 5-27 Fuel Range: The Fuel Range display shows the approximate distance the vehicle can be driven without refueling. LOW will be displayed when the vehicle is low on fuel. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. Average Fuel Economy: The Average Fuel Economy display shows the approximate average liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number is calculated based on the number of L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the last time this menu item was reset. The Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding SEL while this display is active. Instantaneous Fuel Economy: The Instantaneous Fuel Economy display shows the current fuel economy in either liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg). This number reflects only the fuel economy that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently as driving conditions change. Average Speed: The Average Speed display shows the average speed of the vehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles per hour (mph). This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds recorded since the last reset of this value. The average speed can be reset by pressing and holding SEL while this display is active. Timer: This display can be used as a timer. To start the timer, press SEL while this display is active. The display will show the amount of time that has passed since the timer was last reset. To stop the timer, press SEL briefly while this display is active and the timer is running. To reset the timer to zero, press and hold SEL while this display is active. Compass: The Compass display shows the direction the vehicle is driving. Turn Arrow: The Turn Arrow display shows the next maneuver when using route guidance. Travel Time: The Travel Time display shows the estimated time duration remaining for the current route. Distance to Destination: The Distance to Destination display shows the distance to the destination when using route guidance.

138 5-28 Instruments and Controls Speed Limit: The Speed Limit display shows the current speed limit. The information for this page comes from a roadway database. Speed Warning: The Speed Warning display allows the driver to set a speed that they do not want to exceed. To set the Speed Warning, press SEL when Speed Warning is displayed. Press y or z to adjust the value. This feature can be turned off by pressing and holding SEL while viewing this page. If the selected speed limit is exceeded, a pop-up warning is displayed and a chime may sound. Cruise Set Speed: The Cruise Set Speed display shows the speed the cruise control or Adaptive Cruise Control is set to. Battery Voltage: The Battery Voltage display shows the current battery voltage. Oil Life: The Oil Life display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is displayed, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See Engine Oil Messages on page The oil should be changed as soon as possible. See Engine Oil on page In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance Schedule. See Maintenance Schedule on page Remember, the Oil Life display must be reset after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the Oil Life display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, press and hold SEL for several seconds while the Oil Life display is active. See Engine Oil Life System on page Tire Pressure: The Tire Pressure display shows the approximate pressures of all four tires. Tire pressure is displayed in either kilopascal (kpa) or in pounds per square inch (psi). If the pressure is low, the value for that tire is shown in amber. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page Blank Page: The Blank Page display allows for no information to be displayed in the DIC display zone(s).

139 Instruments and Controls 5-29 Head-Up Display (HUD) { WARNING If the HUD image is too bright or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it is dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view. For vehicles with HUD, some information concerning the operation of the vehicle is projected onto the windshield. This includes the speedometer reading, rpm reading, transmission position, compass heading, audio/phone information, and Turn-by-Turn Navigation information. The images are projected through the HUD lens on the driver side of the instrument panel. Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as a parking aid, you may misjudge the distance and damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUD image as a parking aid. The HUD information can be displayed in various languages. The speedometer reading and other numerical values can be displayed in either English or metric units. The language selection is changed through the radio and the units of measurement is changed through the instrument cluster. See Vehicle Personalization on page 5 43 and Settings under Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. HUD Display on the Vehicle Windshield The HUD information appears as an image focused out toward the front of the vehicle. The HUD may display different alerts and information for vehicles equipped with these features:. Traction Control System (TCS). StabiliTrak System. Collision Alert. Gap Adjust

140 5-30 Instruments and Controls. Upcoming Maneuver from OnBoard Navigation. Upcoming Maneuver from OnStar. Incoming Call When the HUD is on, the speedometer reading is continually displayed, except when an imminent navigation maneuver is being shown. The current audio, phone, or navigation alert temporarily displays if their status changes. This occurs if the steering wheel controls are used to adjust a setting or acknowledge an alert. The HUD control is to the left of the steering wheel. To adjust the HUD image so that items are properly displayed: 1. Adjust the driver seat to a comfortable position. 2. Start the engine. 3. Adjust the HUD controls. Use the following settings to adjust the HUD. $ (Image Adjustment): Press down or lift up to center the HUD image. The HUD image can only be adjusted up and down, not side to side.! (Display View): Press to select the display view. Release when the desired display is shown on the HUD. If vehicle messages are displayed, pressing the DIC select button may clear the message. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page D (Brightness): Lift up and hold to brighten the display. Press down and hold to dim the display. Hold down to turn the display off. There are four views in the HUD display: Metric English Speed View: This display gives the speedometer reading (in English or metric units), speed limit, Adaptive Cruise Control speed, Forward Collision Alert, Lane Departure Warning, and Vehicle Ahead indicator. Some information only appears on vehicles that have these features, and when they are active.

141 Instruments and Controls 5-31 closer you get to the maneuver. All navigation information is provided to the HUD by the navigation radio or OnStar (if equipped). Metric Metric Metric English Audio/Phone View: This display includes the information in speed view along with audio/phone information. The current radio station, media type, and incoming calls will be displayed. English Navigation View: This display includes the information in speed view along with Turn-by-Turn Navigation information. The compass heading is displayed when navigation routing is not active. All formats will briefly show the Turn-by-Turn Navigation alerts and provide details about the next driving maneuver to be made. When you are near the next maneuver, the HUD displays a distance bar that will empty the English Performance View: This display gives the speedometer reading (in English or metric units), rpm reading, transmission positions, and gear shift indicator.

142 5-32 Instruments and Controls The HUD image displayed on the windshield will automatically dim and brighten to compensate for outside lighting. However, the HUD brightness control can still be adjusted as needed. The HUD image can temporarily light up depending on the angle and position of the sunlight on the HUD display. This is normal and will change when the angle of the sunlight on the HUD display changes. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see. Care of the HUD Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that could reduce the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image. To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, clean cloth that has household glass cleaner sprayed on it. Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens because the cleaner could leak into the unit. If You Cannot See the HUD Image When the Ignition Is On. Is anything covering the HUD lens?. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough?. Is the HUD image adjusted to the proper height?. Are you wearing polarized sunglasses? If the HUD Image Is Not Clear. Is the HUD image too bright?. Are the windshield and HUD lens clean? If the HUD image is not correct, contact your dealer. Keep in mind that the windshield is part of the HUD system. See Windshield Replacement on page Vehicle Messages Messages displayed on the DIC indicate the status of the vehicle or some action that may be needed to correct a condition. Multiple messages may display one after the other. The messages that do not require immediate action can be acknowledged and cleared by pressing SEL. The messages that require immediate action cannot be cleared until that action is performed. All messages should be taken seriously and clearing the messages does not correct the problem. The following are some of the vehicle messages that may be displayed depending on the vehicle content.

143 Instruments and Controls 5-33 Battery Voltage and Charging Messages BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE This message displays when the vehicle has detected that the battery voltage is dropping beyond a reasonable point. The battery saver system starts reducing features of the vehicle that may be noticed. At the point that features are disabled, this message displays. Turn off unnecessary accessories to allow the battery to recharge. LOW BATTERY This message is displayed when the battery voltage is low. See Battery on page SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM This message is displayed when there is a fault in the battery charging system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. TRANSPORT MODE ON This message is displayed when the vehicle is in transport mode. Some features can be disabled while in this mode, including Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), remote start, and the vehicle alarm system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service to turn transport mode off. Brake System Messages BRAKE FLUID LOW This message is displayed when the brake fluid level is low. See Brake Fluid on page STEP ON BRAKE TO RELEASE PARK BRAKE This message is displayed if you attempt to release the Electric Parking Brake without the brake pedal applied. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page RELEASE PARKING BRAKE This message is displayed if the Electric Parking Brake is on while the vehicle is in motion. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST This message may be displayed when there is a problem with the brake boost assist system. When this message is displayed, the brake boost assist motor might be heard operating and you might notice pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal under these conditions. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. SERVICE PARKING BRAKE This message is displayed when there is a problem with the parking brake. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

144 5-34 Instruments and Controls Compass Messages Dashes may be displayed if the vehicle temporarily loses communication with the Global Positioning System (GPS). Cruise Control Messages ADAPTIVE CRUISE SET TO XXX This message displays when the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed is set. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page ADAPTIVE CRUISE TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE This message displays when attempting to activate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) when it is temporarily unavailable. The ACC system does not need service. This can occur under the following conditions:. The radar is not clean. Keep the radar sensors free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Clean the entire front and/or rear of the vehicle. For cleaning instructions, see Exterior Care on page Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar object detection or camera performance. CRUISE SET TO XXX This message displays when the cruise control speed is set. See Cruise Control on page NO CRUISE BRAKING GAS PEDAL APPLIED This message displays when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is active and the driver is pressing the gas pedal. When this occurs, ACC will not brake. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page Door Ajar Messages DOOR OPEN A door open symbol will be displayed on the DIC showing which door is open. If the vehicle has been shifted out of P (Park), a DOOR OPEN message will also be displayed. If the vehicle is in manual shift mode, the DOOR OPEN message will be displayed if the vehicle starts to move. Close the door completely. HOOD OPEN This message will display along with a hood open symbol when the hood is open. Close the hood completely. TRUNK OPEN This message will display along with a symbol when the trunk is open. Close the trunk completely.

145 Instruments and Controls 5-35 Engine Cooling System Messages A/C OFF ENGINE COOLANT HOT This message displays when the engine coolant becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning compressor turns back on. The vehicle can continue to be driven. If this message continues to appear, have the system repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid damage to the engine. ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE This message displays and a chime sounds when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. The engine coolant temperature warning light will also be on. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. ENGINE OVERHEATED TURN VEHICLE OFF This message displays and a continuous chime sounds if the engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for operation. The engine coolant temperature warning light will flash. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature. Engine Oil Messages CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the Oil Life System. See Engine Oil Life System on page 10 13, Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 5 26, Engine Oil on page 10 11, and Maintenance Schedule on page ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE ENGINE This message displays when the engine oil temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down.

146 5-36 Instruments and Controls ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL On some vehicles, this message displays when the engine oil level may be too low. Check the oil level before filling to the recommended level. If the oil is not low and this message remains on, take the vehicle to your dealer for service. See Engine Oil on page OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced by your dealer. Engine Power Messages ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED This message displays when the vehicle's engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your destination. The performance may be reduced the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on, but maximum acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer for service as soon as possible. Fuel System Messages FUEL LEVEL LOW This message displays when the vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as soon as possible TIGHTEN GAS CAP This message displays when the fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the fuel cap. Key and Lock Messages NO REMOTE KEY WAS DETECTED PLACE KEY IN TRANSMITTER POCKET THEN START YOUR VEHICLE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR DETAILS This message displays when trying to start the vehicle if an RKE transmitter is not detected. The transmitter battery may be weak. See Starting the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Battery under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. NO REMOTE PRESS BRAKE TO RESTART This message is displayed when attempting to turn off the vehicle and the remote is no longer detected. Restarting is allowed without the remote for five minutes. Press the brake pedal to restart the vehicle.

147 Instruments and Controls 5-37 NUMBER OF KEYS PROGRAMMED This message displays when programming new keys to the vehicle. REMOTE LEFT IN VEHICLE This message displays when leaving the vehicle with the RKE transmitter still inside. REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays when the battery in the RKE transmitter needs to be replaced. Lamp Messages AFL (ADAPTIVE FORWARD LIGHTING) LAMPS NEED SERVICE This message displays when the AFL system is disabled and needs service. See your dealer. See Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) on page 6 5. AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON/OFF This message is displayed when the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and the lights have turned on or off. See Automatic Headlamp System on page 6 5. XXX TURN INDICATOR FAILURE When one of the turn signals is out, this message displays to show which bulb needs to be replaced. See Bulb Replacement on page and Replacement Bulbs on page TURN SIGNAL ON This message is displayed if the turn signal has been left on. Turn off the turn signal.

148 5-38 Instruments and Controls Object Detection System Messages 24 GHz RADARS OFF This message displays when driving in certain areas where there may be radar interference. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Forward Collision Alert (FCA), and the Active Emergency Braking System may not work or may not work as well. The vehicle does not need service. AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP UNAVAILABLE This message displays when the Active Emergency Braking System has been unavailable for some time. The Active Emergency Braking System does not need service. This can occur under the following conditions:. The radar is not clean. Keep the radar sensors free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Clean the entire front and/or rear of the vehicle. For cleaning instructions, see Exterior Care on page Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar object detection or camera performance. This message may also be displayed if there is a problem with the StabiliTrak system. FORWARD COLLISION ALERT OFF This message displays when the Forward Collision Alert has been turned off. FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED CLEAN WINDSHIELD This message displays when the camera is blocked. Cleaning the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror may correct the issue. The Lane Departure Warning system will not operate. Forward Collision Alert (FCA) may not work or may not work as well. LANE DEPARTURE WARNING UNAVAILABLE This message displays when attempting to activate the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system when it is temporarily unavailable. The LDW system does not need service. This message could be due to the camera being blocked. Cleaning the outside of the windshield behind the rearview mirror may correct the issue.

149 Instruments and Controls 5-39 PARK ASSIST OFF This message displays when the Parking Assist system has been turned off or when there is a temporary condition causing the system to be disabled. REAR AUTO BRAKE AND PARK ASSIST UNAVAILABLE This message displays when attempting to activate the parking and backing features of the Driver Assistance System when they are temporarily unavailable. The system does not need service. This can occur under the following conditions:. The radar is not clean. Keep the radar sensors free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. Clean the entire front and/or rear of the vehicle. For cleaning instructions, see Exterior Care on page Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar object detection or camera performance. See Driver Assistance Systems on page SERVICE AUTOMATIC COLLISION PREP If this message displays, take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system. SERVICE DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM If this message displays, take the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Active Emergency Braking System, Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing, and/or Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system may not work. Do not use these systems until the vehicle has been repaired. SERVICE FRONT CAMERA If this message remains on after continued driving, the vehicle needs service. Do not use the Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Forward Collision Alert (FCA) features. Take the vehicle to your dealer. SERVICE PARK ASSIST This message displays if there is a problem with the Parking Assist system. Do not use this system to help you park. See your dealer for service. SERVICE REAR AUTO BRAKE AND PARK ASSIST This message displays if there is a problem with the parking and backing features of the Driver Assistance System. Do not use this system to help park or back the vehicle. See your dealer for service.

150 5-40 Instruments and Controls SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT OFF This message indicates that the driver has turned the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) system off. SERVICE SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM If this message remains on after continued driving, the vehicle needs service. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) features will not work. Take the vehicle to your dealer. SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE This message indicates that Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) are disabled either because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in the blind zone, or the vehicle is passing through an open area, such as the desert, where there is insufficient data for operation. This message may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does not need service. For cleaning, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on page Ride Control System Messages ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF If the vehicle has the All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) system, this message displays when there is a temporary condition making the AWD system unavailable. The vehicle will run in 2WD. This could be caused by:. Loss of wheel or vehicle speed. AWD system overheat. Certain vehicle electrical conditions This message turns off when the above conditions are no longer present and the warning message is reset. See All-Wheel Drive on page SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE This message displays if a problem occurs with the All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) system. The vehicle will run in 2WD. This could be caused by:. An electronics problem. Worn out or overheated clutch plates. Various electrical issues The system may need service. See your dealer. SERVICE STABILITRAK This message displays if there is a problem with the StabiliTrak system. See StabiliTrak System on page SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM This message displays when there is a problem with the MagneRide system. See Driver Mode Control on page Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.

151 Instruments and Controls 5-41 SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL This message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS). See Traction Control System (TCS) on page TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message may display when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned off. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 9 34 TRACTION CONTROL ON This message may display when the Traction Control System (TCS) has been turned on. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 9 34 Airbag System Messages SERVICE AIRBAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. Security Messages THEFT ATTEMPTED This message displays if the vehicle detects a tamper condition. Service Vehicle Messages SERVICE AC SYSTEM This message displays if there is a problem with the air conditioning system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. SERVICE POWER STEERING This message displays if there is a problem with the power steering system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. SERVICE STEERING COLUMN LOCK This message displays if there is a problem with the steering column lock. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the vehicle. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service. Starting the Vehicle Messages PRESS BRAKE TO START VEHICLE This message is displayed when attempting to start the vehicle without first pressing the brake pedal. SERVICE KEYLESS START SYSTEM This message is displayed if there is a problem with the pushbutton start system. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.

152 5-42 Instruments and Controls TURN STEERING WHEEL START VEHICLE AGAIN This message may display when you try to start the vehicle, but the column remains locked. Try turning the steering wheel while starting the vehicle to unlock the steering column. If the vehicle still does not start, turn the steering wheel the other way, and try starting the vehicle again. Tire Messages SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM This message displays if there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays when the system is learning new tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE This message displays when the pressure in one or more of the tires is low. This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate the location of the low tire. The low tire pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire Pressure Light on page If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can. Inflate the tires by adding air until the tire pressure is equal to the values shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tires on page 10 42, Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 11, and Tire Pressure on page You can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page Transmission Messages SERVICE TRANSMISSION This message displays if there is a problem with the transmission. See your dealer. SHIFT DENIED This message displays when using the Driver Shift Control (DSC) and attempting to shift to a gear not appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute (rpm). See Manual Mode on page SHIFT TO PARK This message displays when the transmission needs to be shifted to P (Park). This may appear when attempting to remove the key from the vehicle if the vehicle is not in P (Park).

153 Instruments and Controls 5-43 TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE This message displays and a chime sounds if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message clears when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level. Vehicle Reminder Messages ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible. Vehicle Speed Messages SELECTED SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED This message is displayed when the vehicle speed is greater than the set speed. See "Speed Warning" under Driver Information Center (DIC) on page VEHICLE SPEED LIMITED This message is displayed under certain conditions when there is a problem and the vehicle s speed is being limited. Washer Fluid Messages WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message may display when the washer fluid level is low. See Washer Fluid on page Vehicle Personalization The audio system controls are used to access the personalization menus for customizing vehicle features. Base Radio Audio System Controls MENU: Press the center of the knob to enter the menus and select menu items. Turn the knob to scroll through the menus. S BACK: Press to exit or move backward in a menu. To access the personalization menu: 1. On the Home page, turn the MENU knob to highlight Settings and press the MENU knob. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Vehicle Settings and press the MENU knob.

154 5-44 Instruments and Controls CUE Infotainment System Audio System Controls To access the personalization menu: 1. Press SETTINGS on the Home page on the infotainment system display. 2. Press Vehicle Settings. 3. Press the desired feature to display a list of available options. 4. Press to select the desired feature setting. 5. Press the 0 to return to the previous menu. Personalization Menus The following list of menu items may be available:. Climate and Air Quality. Collision/Detection Systems. Comfort and Convenience. Language. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Locking, Unlocking, Starting. Return to Factory Settings Climate and Air Quality Select the Climate and Air Quality menu and the following may be displayed:. Auto Fan Max Speed. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog Auto Fan Max Speed This feature will set the maximum auto fan speed. Select Low, Medium, or High. Auto Defog This will turn auto defog on or off. Only vehicles with the uplevel dual automatic climate control system will have this option. Select Off or On. Auto Rear Defog If equipped, this will turn auto rear defog on or off. This feature will automatically turn on the rear window defogger when it is cold outside. Select Off or On. Collision/Detection Systems Select the Collision/Detection Systems menu and the following will be displayed (if equipped):. Alert Type. Auto Collision Preparation. Park Assist. Go Notifier. Side Blind Zone Alert Alert Type This feature will set crash alerts to beeps or seat vibrations. This setting affects all crash alerts including Forward Collision,

155 Instruments and Controls 5-45 Lane Departure Warning, Adaptive Cruise Control, Parking Assist, and Backing Warning alerts. Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat. Auto Collision Preparation This feature will turn on or off the Forward Collision Alert feature as well as the Automatic Braking capability of the Auto Collision Preparation feature. With the Alert & Brake setting, both Forward Collision Alert as well as the Automatic Braking capability of the Auto Collision Preparation feature are available. The Alert setting disables most automatic braking functions of the Auto Collision Preparation feature. Some last-second automatic braking capability is still provided with the Alert setting, but it is much less likely to be triggered by most driving conditions. Off disables all Forward Collision Alert and Automatic Braking capabilities of the Auto Collision Preparation feature. See Active Emergency Braking System on page Select Off, Alert & Brake, or Alert. Park Assist This allows the Ultrasonic Parking Assist feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Go Notifier This feature will give a reminder that Adaptive Cruise Control provides when it has brought the vehicle to a complete stop behind another stopping vehicle, and then that vehicle drives on. Select Off or On. Side Blind Zone Alert This allows the Side Blind Zone Alert feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Comfort and Convenience Select the Comfort and Convenience menu and the following will be displayed:. Auto Memory Recall. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Easy Exit Options. Chime Volume. Personalization by Driver. Rain Sense Wipers Auto Memory Recall This allows the Auto Memory Recall feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. On some vehicles select Off, On - Driver Door Open, or On - At ignition On.

156 5-46 Instruments and Controls Reverse Tilt Mirror When on, both the driver and passenger, driver, or passenger mirrors will tilt downward when the vehicle is shifted to R (Reverse) to improve visibility of the ground near the rear wheels. They will return to their previous driving position when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) or the ignition is turned to OFF. Select Off, On - Driver and Passenger, On - Driver, or On - Passenger. Easy Exit Options This allows the Easy Exit Options feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Chime Volume This allows the selection of the chime volume level. Select a volume between 0 and 63. Rain Sense Wipers This allows the Rain Sense Wipers feature to be turned on or off. Select Disabled or Enabled. Language Select the Language menu and the following will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish Select the language. The selected language will display on the system, and voice recognition will reflect the selected language. Lighting Select the Lighting menu and the following will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting. Left or Right Hand Traffic. Auto High Beam. Adaptive High Beam. Adaptive Forward Lighting. Daytime Tail Lights Vehicle Locator Lights This allows the vehicle locator lights to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Exit Lighting This allows the selection of how long the exterior lamps stay on when leaving the vehicle when it is dark outside. Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60 Seconds, or 120 Seconds.

157 Instruments and Controls 5-47 Left or Right Hand Traffic This allows the selection to change the vehicle for left hand or right hand traffic. Select Left Hand Traffic or Right Hand Traffic. On some vehicles select Left Hand Traffic, Right Hand Traffic, or Automatic (GPS). Auto High Beam This allows the Auto High Beam to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. On some vehicles select Off, Normal Sensitivity, or Low Sensitivity. Adaptive High Beam This allows the vehicle locator lights to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. On some vehicles elect Off, Normal Sensitivity, or Low Sensitivity. Adaptive Forward Lighting This allows the selection of how long the exterior lamps stay on when leaving the vehicle when it is dark outside. Select Corner and Curve Lighting or Intelligent Light Distribution. On some vehicles select Corner and Curve Lighting, Intelligent Light Distribution, or GPS Assistance. Daytime Tail Lights This allows the Daytime Tail Lights to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Power Door Locks Select Power Door Locks and the following will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Lock. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out When on, this feature will keep the driver door from locking when the door is open. If Off is selected, the Delayed Door Lock menu will be available. Select Off or On. Auto Door Lock This allows selection of which of the doors will automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) (automatic transmission) or at 13 km/h (8 mph) (manual transmission). Select Off or On. Auto Door Unlock This allows selection of which of the doors will automatically unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) (automatic transmission) or when the key is removed from the ignition (manual transmission). Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.

158 5-48 Instruments and Controls Delayed Door Lock When on, this feature will delay the locking of the doors. To override the delay, press the power door lock switch on the doors. Select Off or On. Remote Lock, Unlock, and Start Select Remote Lock/Unlock and the following may be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Relock Remotely Unlocked Doors. Remote Start. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Passive Door Unlock. Passive Door Lock. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder Remote Unlock Light Feedback When on, the exterior lamps will flash when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Select Off or Flash Lights. Remote Lock Feedback This allows selection of what type of feedback is given when locking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Select Off, Lights and Horn, Lights Only, or Horn Only. Remote Door Unlock This allows selection of which doors will unlock when pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter. Select All Doors or Driver Door Only. Relock Remotely Unlocked Doors When on, if the doors are unlocked from the RKE transmitter and a door is not opened, the doors will automatically relock. Select Off or On. Remote Start This allows the remote start feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats If equipped and turned on, this feature will turn the heated seats on when using remote start on cold days. Select Off or On. On some vehicles select Off, On - Driver and Passenger, or On - Driver. Passive Door Unlock This allows passive unlocking to be turned on or off and selects what doors will unlock. Select All Doors or Driver Door Only. Passive Door Lock This allows passive locking to be turned on or off and selects feedback.

159 Instruments and Controls 5-49 Select On, On with Horn Chirp, or Off. Remote Left in Vehicle Reminder This allows the remote left in vehicle feature to be turned on or off. Select Off or On. Return to Factory Settings Select Return to Factory Settings and the following list may display:. Restore Vehicle Settings. Clear All Private Data. Restore Radio Settings Restore Vehicle Settings This allows selection of restoring vehicle settings. Select Cancel or Continue. Clear All Private Data This allows selection to clear all private information from the vehicle. Select Cancel or Continue. Restore Radio Settings This allows selection to restore radio settings. Select Cancel or Continue. Universal Remote System See Radio Frequency Statement on page for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

160 5-50 Instruments and Controls Universal Remote System Programming If the vehicle has this feature, you will see these buttons with one indicator light next to them in the overhead console. This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Do not use the Universal Remote system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1,1982. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Universal Remote system. Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another person available to assist with programming the Universal Remote system. Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Universal Remote system programming. It is also recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Remote system buttons be erased for security purposes. See Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons later in this section. When programming a garage door, park outside of the garage. Park directly in line with and facing the garage door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate being programmed. It is recommended that a new battery be installed in the hand-held transmitter for quicker and more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. Programming the Universal Remote System For questions or help programming the Universal Remote system, call or go to Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated.

161 Instruments and Controls 5-51 To program up to three devices: 1. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the Universal Remote system buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). 2. At the same time, press and hold both the hand-held transmitter button and one of the three Universal Remote system buttons to be used to operate the garage door. Do not release the Universal Remote system button or the hand-held transmitter button until the indicator light changes from a slowly to a rapidly flashing light. You now may release both buttons. Some entry gates and garage door openers may require substitution of Step 2 with the procedure noted in Gate Operator and Canadian Programming later in this section. 3. Press and hold for five seconds the newly trained Universal Remote system button (the button selected in Step 2) while observing the indicator light and garage door activation.. If the indicator light stays on continuously or the garage door starts to move when the Universal Remote system button is pressed and released, then the programming is complete. There is no need to continue programming Steps If the Universal Remote system indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, then turns to a constant light and the garage door does not move, continue with programming Steps 4 6. It may be helpful to have another person assist with the remaining Steps 4 6. Learn or Smart Button 4. After Steps 1 3 have been completed, locate the Learn or Smart button inside the garage on the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

162 5-52 Instruments and Controls 5. Firmly press and release the Learn or Smart button. After pressing this button, you will have 30 seconds to complete Step Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold for two seconds the Universal Remote system button, selected in Step 2 to control the garage door, and then release it. If the garage door does not move or the lamp on the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) does not flash, press and hold the same button a second time for two seconds, then release it. Again, if the door does not move or the garage door lamp does not flash, press and hold the same button a third time for two seconds, then release. The Universal Remote system should now activate the garage door. To program the remaining two Universal Remote system buttons, begin with Step 1 of Programming the Universal Remote System. Gate Operator and Canadian Programming If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Remote system, call or go to Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission. This may not be long enough for the Universal Remote system to pick up the signal during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to time out in the same manner. If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming the Universal Remote System procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 2 under Programming the Universal Remote System with the following: Continue to press and hold the Universal Remote system button while you press and release every two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Remote system. The Universal Remote system indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under Programming the Universal Remote System to complete. Universal Remote System Operation Using the Universal Remote System Press and hold the appropriate Universal Remote system button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on while the signal is being transmitted.

163 Instruments and Controls 5-53 Erasing Universal Remote System Buttons All programmed buttons should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease ends. To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal Remote system device: 1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. This should take about 10 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. Reprogramming a Single Universal Remote System Button To reprogram any of the three Universal Remote system buttons: 1. Press and hold the desired Universal Remote system button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 1 under Programming the Universal Remote System. If you have questions or need help programming the Universal Remote system, call or go to You may also call the customer assistance phone number under Customer Assistance Offices (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 4 or Customer Assistance Offices (Mexico) on page 13 5.

164 5-54 Instruments and Controls 2 NOTES

165 Lighting Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls Exterior Lamps Off Reminder Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer Flash-to-Pass Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Automatic Headlamp System Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change Signals Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control Courtesy Lamps Dome Lamps Reading Lamps Lighting Features Entry Lighting Exit Lighting Battery Power Protection Exterior Lighting Battery Saver Lighting 6-1 Exterior Lighting Exterior Lamp Controls The exterior lamp control is on the turn and lane change lever. Turn the control to the following positions: O (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps. The knob returns to the AUTO position after it is released. Turn to O again to reactivate the AUTO mode.

166 6-2 Lighting In Canada, the headlamps will automatically reactivate when the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) on automatic transmission vehicles, and when the parking brake is released on manual transmission vehicles. AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns the exterior lamps on and off, depending on outside lighting. ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps together with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights 2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with the following:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Parking Lamps Automatic High-Beam System This system turns the vehicle's high-beam headlamps on and off according to surrounding traffic conditions. The system turns the high-beam headlamps on when it is dark enough and there is no other traffic present. This light comes on in the instrument cluster when the automatic high-beam system is enabled. Turning On and Enabling Automatic High Beams To enable the automatic high-beam system, with the turn and lane-change lever in the neutral position, turn the exterior lamp control to AUTO. The blue high-beam on light appears on the instrument cluster when the high beams are on. Driving with Automatic High Beams The system only activates the high beams when driving over 40 km/h (25 mph). There is a sensor near the top center of the windshield, which automatically controls the system. Keep this area of the windshield clear of debris to allow for best system performance.

167 The high-beam headlamps remain on, under the automatic control, until one of the following situations occurs:. The system detects an approaching vehicle's headlamps.. The system detects a preceding vehicle's taillamps.. The outside light is bright enough that high-beam headlamps are not required.. The vehicle's speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph).. The turn and lane-change lever is moved forward to the high-beam position or the Flash-to-Pass feature is used. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 6 4 and Flash-to-Pass on page The automatic high-beam system can be disabled by the High/Low-Beam Changer or the Flash-to-Pass feature. If this happens, the High/Low-Beam Changer must be activated two times within five seconds to reactivate the automatic high-beam system. The instrument cluster light will come on to indicate the automatic high-beam system is reactivated. The high beams may not turn off automatically if the system cannot detect other vehicle's lamps because of any of the following:. The other vehicle's lamp(s) are missing, damaged, obstructed from view, or otherwise undetected.. The other vehicle's lamp(s) are covered with dirt, snow, and/or road spray.. The other vehicle's lamp(s) cannot be detected due to dense exhaust, smoke, fog, snow, road spray, mist, or other airborne obstructions. Lighting 6-3. Your vehicle's windshield is dirty, cracked, or obstructed by something that blocks the view of the light sensor.. Your vehicle's windshield is covered with ice, dirt, haze, or other obstructions.. Your vehicle is loaded such that the front end points upward, causing the light sensor to aim high and not detect headlamps and taillamps.. You are driving on winding or hilly roads. You may need to manually disable or cancel the high-beam headlamps by turning the low-beam headlamps on, if any of the above conditions exist.

168 6-4 Lighting Exterior Lamps Off Reminder A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position and the driver door is opened with the ignition off. Headlamp High/ Low-Beam Changer 2 3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer): Push the turn signal lever away from you and release, to turn the high beams on. To return to low beams, push the lever again or pull it toward you and release. This indicator light turns on in the instrument cluster when the high-beam headlamps are on. Flash-to-Pass This feature allows the high-beam headlamps to be used to signal the driver in front of you that you want to pass. Pull and hold the turn signal lever toward you to use this feature. When this is done the following will occur:. If the headlamps are off or in low-beam mode, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will stay on as long as the lever is held there. Release the lever to turn them off.. If the headlamps are in high-beam mode, they will go to low beam. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. The DRL system turns on the low-beam headlamps at a reduced brightness. For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps, there is a dedicated DRL. The DRL will come on when all of the following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is in AUTO.. The light sensor determines it is daytime.. The parking brake is released or the vehicle is not in P (Park). The taillamps, sidemarker lamps, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on. The DRL turn off when the headlamps are turned to O or the ignition is off.

169 Automatic Headlamp System When the exterior lamp control is set to AUTO and it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come on automatically. There is a light sensor on top of the instrument panel. Do not cover the sensor, otherwise the headlamps will come on when they are not needed. The system may also turn on the headlamps when driving through a parking garage or tunnel. When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps will turn off or may change to Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). The automatic headlamp system turns off when the exterior lamp control is turned to O or the ignition is off. Lights On with Wipers If the windshield wipers are activated in daylight with the engine on, and the exterior lamp control is in AUTO, the headlamps, parking lamps, and other exterior lamps come on. The transition time for the lamps coming on varies based on wiper speed. When the wipers are not operating, these lamps turn off. Move the exterior lamp control to P or ; to disable this feature. Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) Lighting 6-5 On vehicles with the AFL system, the headlamps pivot horizontally to provide greater road illumination while turning. To enable AFL, set the exterior lamp control on the turn signal lever to the AUTO position. Moving the control out of the AUTO position will deactivate the system. AFL will operate when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 km/h (2 mph). AFL will not operate when the transmission is in R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately operable after starting the vehicle; driving a short distance is required to calibrate the AFL. See Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6 1.

170 6-6 Lighting Hazard Warning Flashers (Hazard Warning Flashers): Press this button on the center stack to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers off. The hazard warning flashers turn on automatically if the airbags deploy. Turn and Lane-Change Signals Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. An arrow on the instrument cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the lane change is completed. If the lever is briefly pressed and released, the turn signal flashes three times. The turn and lane-change signal can be turned off manually by moving the lever back to its original position. If after signaling a turn or lane change, the arrow flashes rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb might be burned out. Replace any burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page

171 Interior Lighting Instrument Panel Illumination Control Dome Lamps The dome lamp is in the overhead console. Reading Lamps Lighting 6-7 There are reading lamps on the overhead console and over the rear passenger doors. These lamps come on when any door is opened. To manually turn the reading lamps on or off: The brightness of the instrument panel lighting and steering wheel controls can be adjusted. D (Instrument Panel Illumination): Move the thumbwheel up or down to brighten or dim the lights. Courtesy Lamps The courtesy lamps come on when any door is opened and the dome lamp is in the DOOR position. To change the dome lamp settings, press: OFF: Turns the lamp off, even when a door is open. DOOR: The lamp comes on when a door is opened. ON: Turns the lamp on. Press m or n next to each overhead console reading lamp. Press the lamp lens to turn the rear passenger reading lamps on or off.

172 6-8 Lighting Lighting Features Entry Lighting The headlamps, taillamps, license plate lamps, back-up lamps, outside mirror lamps, exterior door handle lamps, dome lamp, and most of the interior lights turn on briefly when K is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. When the driver door is opened, all control lights, Driver Information Center (DIC) lights, and door pocket lights turn on. After about 30 seconds the exterior lamps turn off, then the dome lamp and remaining interior lights dim to off. Entry lighting can be disabled manually by changing the ignition out of the OFF position, or by pressing Q on the RKE transmitter. This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Locator Lights under Vehicle Personalization on page Exit Lighting The headlamps, taillamps, parking lamps, back-up lamps, outside mirror lamps, license plate lamps, and exterior door handle lamps come on at night, or in areas with limited lighting, when a door is opened after the ignition is turned off. The dome lamp comes on after the ignition is changed to the OFF position. The exterior lamps and dome lamp remain on after the door is closed for a set amount of time, then automatically turn off. The exterior lamps turn off immediately by turning the exterior lamp control off. This feature can be changed. See Vehicle Personalization on page Battery Power Protection The battery saver feature is designed to protect the vehicle's battery. If some interior lamps are left on and the ignition is turned off, the battery rundown protection system automatically turns the lamp off after some time. Exterior Lighting Battery Saver The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, if the parking lamps or headlamps have been manually left on. This protects against draining the battery. To restart the 10-minute timer, turn the exterior lamp control to the off position and then back to the parking lamp or headlamp position. To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, the ignition must be in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position.

173 Infotainment System Introduction Infotainment Theft-Deterrent Feature Overview Home Page Software Updates Radio AM-FM Radio Satellite Radio Radio Reception Backglass Antenna Multi-Band Antenna Audio Players CD Player USB Port SD Card Reader Auxiliary Jack Phone Bluetooth (Overview) Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) Trademarks and License Agreements Trademarks and License Agreements Infotainment System 7-1 Introduction Infotainment Read the following pages to become familiar with the infotainment system featured in this owner manual. { WARNING Taking your eyes off the road for too long or too often while using any infotainment features can cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Do not give extended attention to infotainment tasks while driving. Focus your attention on driving and limit glances to the instrument cluster or center stack screens. Use voice guidance whenever possible.

174 7-2 Infotainment System The infotainment system has built-in features intended to help with this by disabling some functions when driving. A grayed-out function is not available when the vehicle is moving. All functions are available when the vehicle is parked. Before driving:. Become familiar with the infotainment system operation and buttons on the faceplate.. Set up the audio by presetting favorite stations, setting the tone, and adjusting the speakers.. Set up phone numbers in advance so they can be called easily by pressing a single button or by using a single voice command for vehicles equipped with phone capability. See Defensive Driving on page 9 3. This vehicle s infotainment system may be equipped with a noise reduction system, which can work improperly if the audio amplifier, engine calibrations, exhaust system, microphones, radio, or speakers are modified or replaced. This could result in more noticeable engine noise at certain speeds. The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page The base radio is included in this manual. See the CUE infotainment manual for information on the CUE radio, audio players, phone, navigation system, and voice or speech recognition. There is also information on settings and downloadable applications (if equipped). Theft-Deterrent Feature TheftLock is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.

175 Infotainment System 7-3 Overview Infotainment System Overview The infotainment system is controlled by using the buttons on the faceplate and steering wheel controls. 1. FAV (Favorite Pages). Press to scroll through the favorite pages for each source. 2. O (Power/Volume). Press to turn the audio on or off.. Press and hold to clear the screen and display the time.. Press to mute the system. Press again to unmute.. Turn the knob to adjust the volume (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse). Press to seek to the beginning of the current or previous track. If the track has been playing for less than five seconds, it seeks the previous track. If longer than five seconds, the current track starts from the beginning.

176 7-4 Infotainment System. Press and hold to quickly reverse through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. See CD Player on page For AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped), press to seek to the previous strong station (Seek Next/Fast Forward). Press to seek the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. See CD Player on page For AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped), press to seek to the next strong station. 5. MENU. Press to access the menu for the current audio source.. Press to select the highlighted menu option.. Turn to scroll through a list. 6. { (Home Page). See Home Page following in this section. 7. RADIO. Press to change the audio source between AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped). 8. MEDIA. Press to change the audio source between CD, USB, SD Card, and AUX. 9. PHONE. See Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 7 23 or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on page 7 27 or Bluetooth (Overview) on page S BACK. Press to return to the previous screen in a menu.. On a page accessed directly by a faceplate button or Home Page screen button, press S BACK to go to the previous menu. Home Page Home Page Features The infotainment system displays a Home Page that makes it easy to access all of the applications. Turn the MENU knob to highlight feature icons. Press the MENU knob to access the feature s options. Various functions are disabled when the vehicle is moving.

177 Infotainment System 7-5 AUDIO: Select the AUDIO screen icon to display the active source page. The sources available are AM, FM, SiriusXM (if equipped), CD, USB/iPod, AUX, and SD Card. See AM-FM Radio on page 7 8, Satellite Radio on page 7 11, CD Player on page 7 13, and Auxiliary Jack on page PHONE: Select the PHONE screen icon to display the Phone main page. See PHONE in this section. NAV: Select the NAV screen icon to display the last Turn-by-Turn maneuver if a destination was downloaded. See Navigation on page SETTINGS: Select the SETTINGS screen icon to display the Settings main page. See Setting Radio Preferences in this section. Setting Radio Preferences Select the SETTINGS screen icon to display the Settings menu and the following may display: Time: See Clock (Base Radio) on page 5 6 or Clock (Uplevel Radio) on page 5 6. Language (Current Language): This will set the display language in the radio, instrument cluster, and voice recognition. Press to display a list of languages. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Valet Mode: 1. Type a four-digit code on the circular numeric keypad. Turn the MENU knob to highlight a number. 2. Press the MENU knob to select it. Do this for each one of the four digits. Select Enter to go to the confirmation screen. 3. Re-enter the four-digit code. Select LOCK to lock the system. This will also lock the vehicle storage locations, if equipped. 4. Type the four-digit code to unlock the system. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Radio: See Radio Setup later in this section. Vehicle: See Vehicle Personalization on page Display: Press the MENU knob to turn the display on or off. Return to Factory Settings: See Return to Factory Settings later in this section. Software Information: Press the MENU knob to select Save Vehicle Info to USB. Press the MENU knob again to start downloading the vehicle information to the USB.

178 7-6 Infotainment System Radio Setup While at the active screen, such as AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped), press and hold the area just above the chrome bar and below one of the preset screen buttons to save the current station as a favorite. Press the area just above the chrome bar to recall a favorite station. From the Home Screen, turn the MENU knob to select Settings application and push the MENU knob to select. Turn again to select "Radio" settings menu and push to select. Turn again to select "Manage Favorites" and push to select. From the RADIO screen icon, the following may be displayed: Manage Favorites:. Turn the MENU knob and push to select a Favorite.. Push the area just above the chrome bar and below the DELETE screen button to delete a favorite.. While a station is highlighted, press the MOVE screen button. The screen button will change to DROP. Turn the MENU knob and the station tab will follow the path to the desired location. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the DROP screen button to relocate the station. Number of Favorites Shown: To set the number of favorites for display, select Auto to automatically adjust the number of Favorites pages shown as Favorites are added and removed. Another way to adjust is to select a number from 5 25 to show that selection of favorites. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Audible Touch Feedback: Select Audible Touch Feedback to turn feedback Off or On. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Auto Volume (If Equipped): This feature adjusts the volume based on vehicle speed. The options are Off, Low, Medium-Low, Medium, Medium-High, or High. Select the desired volume. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu.

179 Infotainment System 7-7 Bose AudioPilot Noise Compensation Technology (If Equipped): While turned ON, AutoPilot detects ambient noise and vehicle speed to continuously monitor and adjust many aspects of the audio signal so that your music will sound the same at a set volume level. The options are ON and OFF. This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well the music can be heard while being played through your vehicle s audio system. At higher volume settings, where the music is much louder than the background noise, there may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For more information on Bose AudioPilot noise compensation technology, visit Maximum Startup Volume: This feature sets the maximum startup volume. If the vehicle is started and the volume is greater than this level, the volume is adjusted to this level. To set the maximum startup volume, Turn the MENU knob to increase or decrease startup volume. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Rear Camera (If Equipped) From the Rear Camera screen button, the following may be displayed: Rear Camera Display: This feature will turn the Rear Vision Camera display on or off. Select Rear Camera Display and then select Off or On. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Park Assist Symbols: This feature will display symbols where objects are detected by the Rear Parking Assist system. Select Park Assist Symbols, then select Off or On. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. See Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing on page Rear Cross Traffic Alert: This feature will display an alert icon when cross traffic is detected. Select Rear Cross Traffic Alert, then select Off or On. Press S BACK to go back to the previous menu. Return to Factory Settings Select Return to Factory Settings and the following list may display: Restore Vehicle Settings: This option will restore factory vehicle personalization settings. Select Restore Vehicle Settings. A screen displays stating all vehicle customization settings will be restored to the factory settings. Select Cancel or Confirm. Press S BACK to go back to the last menu.

180 7-8 Infotainment System Clear All Private Data: This option clears all private information from the vehicle. Select Clear All Private Data. Select Cancel or Continue. Press S BACK to go back to the last menu. Restore Radio Settings: This option will restore factory radio settings. Select Restore Radio Settings. A screen displays stating all personalized radio settings will be restored back to the factory settings. Select Cancel or Continue. Press S BACK to go back to the last menu. English and Metric Unit Conversion To change the display units between English and metric units, see Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. Software Updates See the following websites for information: Cadillac In the U.S., see In Canada, see Radio AM-FM Radio Playing the Radio While on the audio main page, press the RADIO or MEDIA button repeatedly to display and scroll through the available sources (AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if equipped), CD, USB, SD, and AUX). The steering wheel controls can also be used to adjust the volume. See Steering Wheel Controls on page 5 2. AM, FM, SiriusXM (If Equipped) To select AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped): 1. Press {. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the AUDIO screen icon. 3. Press the MENU knob to select.

181 Infotainment System Turn the MENU knob to highlight AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped) and press the MENU knob to select. Press the RADIO faceplate button to display the active radio source. Press the MENU knob and the following radio settings may display: Tone Settings:. Bass, Midrange, and Treble: Turn the MENU knob and highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Turn the MENU knob to adjust.. Balance: Turn the MENU knob to highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Turn the MENU knob left for more sound from the left speakers or right for more sound from the right speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the left and right speakers.. Fade: Turn the MENU knob to highlight. Press the MENU knob to select. Turn the MENU knob to the left for more sound from the front speakers and to the right for more sound from the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the front and rear speakers.. EQ (Equalizer): Turn the MENU knob to highlight. Turn the MENU knob to scroll through the options. Press the MENU knob to select. Press the S BACK button to go back to the previous menu. Station List: Select to display a list of AM or FM stations. Press S BACK to go to the previous menu. Auto Volume: If equipped, this feature adjusts the volume based on the vehicle speed. Select the level between off, low, medium-low, medium, medium-high, and high. Press S BACK to go to the previous menu. Bose AudioPilot Noise Compensation Technology (If Equipped): While turned ON, AutoPilot detects ambient noise and vehicle speed to continuously monitor and adjust many aspects of the audio signal so that your music will sound the same at a set volume level. The options are ON and OFF. This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well the music can be heard while being played through your vehicle s audio system. At higher volume settings, where the music is much louder than the background noise, there may be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot. For more information on Bose AudioPilot noise compensation technology, visit

182 7-10 Infotainment System EQ (Equalizer) Settings: For vehicles equipped with a Bose Sound System the available choices are Manual and Talk. DSP Modes: If equipped with a Bose Surround Sound System, it will have the following four DSP modes:. Normal: Adjusts the audio to normal mode. This provides the best sound quality for all seating positions.. Driver: Adjusts the audio to give the driver the best possible sound quality.. Rear: Adjusts the audio to give the rear seat occupants the best possible sound quality.. Centerpoint : Turns on Bose Centerpoint surround technology. Centerpoint creates a surround sound from nearly any audio source; existing CD collection, satellite radio, and audio players. Options for SiriusXM Only XM View: XM view allows the channel list to be viewed by channel name, artist playing on channel, or song playing on channel. Turn the MENU knob to highlight XM view and press the MENU knob to select. Press S BACK to go to the previous menu. Channel List: Select to display a list of SiriusXM stations. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press the MENU knob to select. Press S BACK to go to the previous menu. Also see the radio settings common for all sources earlier in this section. Finding a Station Seeking a Station Press 7 or 6 to search for the previous or next strongest station. Tuning a Station Turn the MENU knob to manually find a station. Storing Radio Station Presets Favorites are stored in the favorites area at the bottom of the screen. Up to 25 preset stations can be stored under the following: AM, FM, or SiriusXM (if equipped): While on the active source main page, such as AM, FM, and SiriusXM (if equipped), press and hold the area just above the chrome bar and below one of the preset screen buttons to save the current station as a favorite. Press the area just above the chrome bar to recall a favorite station. Favorites Favorites can be stored including radio stations and media. To display the favorites page, press the FAV button on the radio faceplate.

183 Infotainment System 7-11 From the Settings menu press the MENU knob to select Manage Favorites. The Manage Favorites feature has the option of moving or deleting a favorite. See Manage Favorites under Home Page on page 7 4. Satellite Radio SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Vehicles with a SiriusXM satellite radio tuner and a valid SiriusXM satellite radio subscription can receive SiriusXM programming. SiriusXM is a satellite radio service based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide variety of programming and commercial-free music, coast to coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service fee is required to receive the SiriusXM service. See or call in the U.S. In Canada, see or call When SirisuXM is active, the channel name and number, song title, and artist display on the screen. Browsing SiriusXM Channels To browse the SiriusXM channels: 1. While XM is the active source, press the MENU knob. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight XM Channel List. Press the MENU knob to select. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight All XM Channels. Press the MENU knob to select and display all channels or select a category. SiriusXM Messages XL (Explicit Language Channels): These stations, or any others, can be blocked by request, by calling in the U.S., and in Canada. Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. Channel Off Air: This station is not currently in service. Channel Unauth: This station is blocked or cannot be received. Channel Not Available: This previously assigned station is no longer assigned. No XM Signal/Reception May Be Blocked: The vehicle may be in a location where the SiriusXM signal is being blocked. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal should return.

184 7-12 Infotainment System XM Radio ID: If tuned to station 0, this message displays with the XM radio eight-digit radio ID label. This label is needed to activate the service. Check Antenna: If this message does not clear within a short period of time, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer. Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet. FM FM signals only reach about 16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the radio has a built-in electronic circuit that automatically works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out. AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static can also occur when things like storms and power lines interfere with radio reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service provides digital radio reception. Tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the SiriusXM signal for a period of time. Cell Phone Usage Cell phone usage, such as making or receiving phone calls, charging, or just having the phone on may cause static interference in the radio. Unplug the phone or turn it off if this happens. Backglass Antenna The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window defogger in the rear window. Do not scratch the inside surface or damage the lines in the glass. If the inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna connector needs to be properly attached to the post on the glass. If attaching a cell phone antenna to the glass, attach it between the grid lines.

185 Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window can damage the rear window antenna and/or the rear window defogger. Repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp objects. Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting materials will interfere with or distort the incoming radio reception. Any damage caused to the backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials will not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Multi-Band Antenna The roof antenna is for OnStar, SiriusXM Satellite Radio, and GPS (Global Positioning System). Keep clear of obstructions for clear reception. If the vehicle has a sunroof, and it is open, reception can also be affected. Audio Players CD Player The player can be used for CD and MP3 audio. With the vehicle on, insert a disc into the slot, label side up. Press the MEDIA button to select CD as a source. The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA formats When playing any compatible recordable disc, the sound quality can be reduced due to disc quality, the method of recording, the quality of the music that has been recorded, or the way the disc has been handled. Infotainment System 7-13 There can be increased skipping, difficulty in recording tracks, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the disc for damage or try a known good disc. To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The labels could get caught in the player.. Insert only one disc at a time.. Keep the loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.. Use a marking pen to label the top of the disc.

186 7-14 Infotainment System Loading and Ejecting Discs To load a disc: 1. Turn the vehicle on. 2. Insert a disc into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in the rest of the way. If the disc is damaged or improperly loaded, there is an error and the disc ejects. Playing an Audio CD Press the MEDIA button on the faceplate until CD is selected. On the CD main page, a track number displays at the beginning of each track. Song, Artist, and Album information displays when available. Use the following controls to play the disc: t or 7 (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse): While on the CD main page, press just above the chrome bar and below the t.. Press to seek to the beginning of the current or previous track. If the track has been playing for less than five seconds, it seeks to the previous track. If longer than five seconds, the current track starts from the beginning.. Press and hold to fast reverse through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays. u or 6 (Seek Next/Fast Forward): While on the CD main page, press just above the chrome bar and below the u.. Press to seek to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward through a track. Release the button to return to playing speed. Elapsed time displays. j /r (Pause/Play): While on the CD main page. Press just above the chrome bar and below pause/play to pause. Press again to resume. Z (Shuffle): Press just above the chrome bar and below the Z to play the songs in random order. Press again to turn off.

187 Infotainment System 7-15 If a Blu-ray Disc or DVD disc is loaded into the CD player and the CD screen button is selected, a message comes on the screen to use the Video application. The Video application is only available on vehicles with rear seat entertainment. CD Menu While on the CD main page, press the MENU knob to display the CD menu and the following may display: Browse: Select to display the files or songs on the CD. See Browse CD Media later in this section. Tone Settings: Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See Tone Settings under AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. Auto Volume: If equipped, this feature adjusts the volume based on the vehicle speed. Select the level between off, low, medium-low, medium, medium-high, and high. Press S BACK to go to the previous menu. Bose AudioPilot : If equipped, this feature can be turned on or off. See Bose AudioPilot in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. EQ (Equalizer) Settings: If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined EQ modes. See EQ (Equalizer) Settings in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. DSP Modes: If equipped with a Bose Surround Sound System, this feature adjusts DSP modes. See DSP Modes in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. Browse CD Media Use to browse the track list on a CD. Error Messages If Disc Error displays and/or the disc comes out, it could be for one of the following reasons:. The disc has an invalid or unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc again when the temperature returns to normal.. The road is very rough. Try the disc again when the road is smoother.. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.. The air is very humid. Try the disc again later.. There was a problem while burning the disc.. The label is caught in the CD player.

188 7-16 Infotainment System If Disc Player Error displays, it could be for one of the following reasons:. The player temperature is too high.. There are load or eject errors. If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, try a known good CD. If any error continues, contact your dealer. Playing an MP3 CD To play an MP3 CD, follow the same instructions as Playing an Audio CD. The following guidelines must be met when creating an MP3 disc, otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 khz, khz, 24 khz, 32 khz, 44.1 khz, and 48 khz.. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256, and 320 kbps.. Maximum number of folders: eight folders with 255 files per folder.. Maximum of 1,000 files on a disc.. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW. Root Directory The root directory is treated as a folder. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. Empty Folders If a root directory or folder is empty or contains only folders, the player advances to the next folder in the file structure that contains a compressed audio file. The empty folder(s) are not displayed or numbered. No Folder When the CD only contains compressed audio files without any folders or playlists, all files are under the root folder. USB Port Playing from a USB A USB mass storage device or Media Transfer Protocol (MTP) device can be connected to the USB port. The USB ports are in the center console under the armrest and in the center stack storage bin. USB MP3 Player and USB Drives. The USB MP3 players and USB drives connected must comply with the USB Mass Storage Class specification (USB MSC).. Hard disk drives are not supported. To play a USB device:. Connect the USB.. Press the MEDIA button on the faceplate until the connected device is shown.

189 While the USB source is active, use the icons on the screen to operate USB function:. t (Seek Previous/Fast Reverse). u (Seek Next/Fast Forward). j /r (Play/Pause). Z (Shuffle) For information on how to use the screen icons, see Playing an Audio CD. USB Menu Press the MENU knob to display the USB menu and the following may display: Browse: Select to display the files and folders on the USB device. Tone Settings: Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See Tone Settings under Playing an Audio CD. Auto Volume: If equipped, see Playing an Audio CD. Bose AudioPilot : If equipped, this feature can be turned on or off. See Bose AudioPilot in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. EQ (Equalizer) Settings: If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined EQ modes. See EQ (Equalizer) Settings in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. DSP Modes: If equipped with a Bose Surround Sound System, this feature adjusts the DSP modes. See DSP Modes in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. Playing from an ipod This feature supports the following ipod models:. ipod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th generation). ipod with video (5.0 and 5.5 generation). Infotainment System ipod classic (6th generation). ipod touch (1st and 2nd generation) There may be problems with operation and function in the following situations:. When connecting an ipod on which a more recent version of the firmware is installed than is supported by the infotainment system.. When connecting an ipod on which firmware from other providers is installed. To connect and control an ipod: 1. Connect one end of the standard ipod USB cable to the ipod's dock connector. 2. Connect the other end to a USB port in the center console or in the center stack storage bin. 3. Press the MEDIA button to select the source.

190 7-18 Infotainment System ipod music information displays on the radio s display and begins playing through the vehicle s audio system. The ipod battery recharges automatically while the vehicle is on. When the vehicle is off while an ipod is connected using the ipod USB cable, the ipod battery stops charging and the ipod automatically turns off. If the ipod is an unsupported model, it can still be listened to in the vehicle by connecting to the auxiliary input jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. ipod Menu Press the MENU knob to display the ipod Menu and the following may display: Browse: Select to display the files or songs on the ipod. See Browse ipod Media later in this section. Tone Settings: Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See Tone Settings under Playing an Audio CD. Auto Volume: If equipped, see Playing an Audio CD. Bose AudioPilot : If equipped, this feature can be turned on or off. See Bose AudioPilot in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. EQ (Equalizer) Settings: If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined EQ modes. See EQ (Equalizer) Settings in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. DSP Modes: If equipped with a Bose Surround Sound System, this feature adjusts the DSP modes. See DSP Modes in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. Browse ipod Media Use the following to browse: Playlists: 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view the playlists stored on the ipod. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select a playlist name to view a list of all songs in the playlist. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback. Artists: 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view the artists stored on the ipod. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select an artist name to view a list of all albums by the artist. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the album from the list.

191 Infotainment System To begin playback, select a song from the album. Albums: 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view the albums stored on the ipod. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select an album name to view a list of all songs on the album. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback. Genres: 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view the genres stored on the ipod. 2. Turn the MENU knob to select a genre name to view a list of artists of that genre. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight an artist and press to select to view albums by that artist. 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select an album to view songs. 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback. Songs: 1. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to view a list of all songs stored on the ipod. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight and press to select the song from the list to begin playback. Playing from an iphone or ipad This feature supports iphone 3G, iphone 3GS, iphone 4, and ipad. Follow the same instructions as stated earlier for using an ipod. SD Card Reader This vehicle has an SD card reader in the center console. Set up any SD card while the vehicle is in P (Park). 1. Plug the SD card into the reader. 2. Press the MEDIA button to select the SD device. If an SD card has already been connected, but a different source is currently active, press the MEDIA screen button repeatedly to cycle through all of the available audio source screens, until the SD card screen is selected. Playing Music from the SD Card An SD card is played the same way a USB device is played. See USB Port on page 7 16.

192 7-20 Infotainment System Auxiliary Jack This vehicle has an AUX port in the center console under the armrest and in the center stack storage bin. Possible auxiliary audio sources include:. Laptop computer. Audio music player This jack is not an audio output. Do not plug headphones into the auxiliary input jack. Auxiliary devices should be set up while the vehicle is in P (Park). Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable from the auxiliary device to the auxiliary input jack. If an auxiliary device has already been connected, but a different source is currently active, press the MEDIA faceplate button repeatedly to scroll through all of the available audio source screens, until the AUX source screen is selected. Playing from the AUX Port An auxiliary device is played through the audio system and controlled through the device itself. AUX Menu Press the MENU knob to display the AUX menu and the following may display: Tone Settings: Select to adjust Bass, Midrange, Treble, Balance, Fade, and EQ (Equalizer). See Tone Settings under Playing an Audio CD. Auto Volume: If equipped, see Playing an Audio CD. Bose AudioPilot : If equipped, this feature can be turned on or off. See Bose AudioPilot in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. EQ (Equalizer) Settings: If equipped, this feature adjusts the pre-defined EQ modes. See EQ (Equalizer) Settings in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8. DSP Modes: If equipped with a Bose Surround Sound System, this feature adjusts the DSP modes. See DSP Modes in AM-FM Radio on page 7 8.

193 Infotainment System 7-21 Phone Bluetooth (Overview) Instructions for using the cell phone may differ between infotainment systems. For vehicles with the CUE infotainment system, see the CUE infotainment manual. Bluetooth-capable systems can interact with many cell phones, allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone s address book or contact list with the vehicle. To minimize driver distraction, before driving, and with the vehicle parked:. Become familiar with the features of the cell phone. Organize the phone book and contact lists clearly and delete duplicate or rarely used entries. If possible, program speed dial or other shortcuts.. Review the controls and operation of the infotainment system.. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. The system may not work with all cell phones. See Pairing in this section.. If the cell phone has voice dialing capability, learn to use that feature to access the address book or contact list. See Voice Pass-Thru in this section.. See Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers in this section. { WARNING When using a cell phone, it can be distracting to look too long or too often at the screen of the phone or the infotainment (Continued) WARNING (Continued) (navigation) system. Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving. Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth-capable cell phone with a Hands-Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The infotainment system and voice recognition are used to control the system. The system can be used while in ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support all functions and not all phones work with the Bluetooth system. See for more information about compatible phones.

194 7-22 Infotainment System Bluetooth Controls Use the buttons on the faceplate and the steering wheel to operate the Bluetooth system. Steering Wheel Controls g (Push to Talk): Press to answer incoming calls, confirm system information, and start voice recognition. c (End Call): Press to end a call, reject a call, or cancel an operation. Press to mute or unmute the infotainment system. Infotainment System Controls For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Overview on page 7 3. MENU: Turn to scroll through the phone menu, including Contact, Recent Calls, Keypad, and Bluetooth Devices. Press to select an entry and dial when appropriate. { (Home Page): Press to go to the Home Page. See Home Page on page 7 4. PHONE: Press to enter the phone main menu. See Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on page 7 23 or Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on page 7 27 or Bluetooth (Overview) on page Voice Recognition The voice recognition system uses commands to control the system and dial phone numbers. Noise: The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise. When to Speak: A tone sounds to indicate that the system is ready for a voice command. Wait for the tone and then speak. How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice. Audio System When using the Bluetooth system, sound comes through the vehicle's front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the O knob during a call to change the volume level. The system maintains a minimum volume level. Bluetooth Audio Quality Turn off the Echo and Noise cancellation feature on your phone, if supported, for the best hands-free performance. See Other Information The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

195 Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) For information about how to navigate the menu system using the infotainment controls, see Overview on page 7 3. Switching to Handset or Handsfree Mode To switch between handset mode, use the OnStar command, transfer call. Pairing A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls can be made using OnStar Hands-Free Calling, if available. SeeOnStar Overview on page Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.. Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time.. If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were newly paired to the system. To link to a different paired phone, see Connecting to a Different Phone after in this section. Infotainment System 7-23 Pairing a Phone or Device 1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob to access the PHONE screen button, then press the MENU knob to select the PHONE screen button. If a device has been previously paired, the main Phone menu will be shown. If no devices have been paired, Step two can be skipped. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones. 3. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the PAIR screen button. A four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN) appears on the display. The PIN is used in Step Start the pairing process on the cell phone to be paired to the vehicle. See the cell phone manufacturer's user guide for information on this process.

196 7-24 Infotainment System 5. Locate the device named Your Vehicle in the list on the cell phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN provided in Step 3. The system recognizes the new connected phone after the pairing process is complete. 6. If the phone prompts to accept connection or allow phone book download, select always accept and allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted. 7. Repeat steps 1 6 to pair additional phones or devices. Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1. To list all paired devices, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones. Deleting a Paired Phone 1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button or press the PHONE button on the faceplate. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the phone to be deleted. 4. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the DELETE screen button to delete the highlighted device. 5. A confirmation screen is displayed. Press the button just below the DELETE screen button to confirm deletion. Connecting to a Different Phone 1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button or press the PHONE button on the faceplate. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Manage Phones. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the phone to be connected. 4. Press the button just below the CONNECT screen button to connect to the highlighted device. Phone Menu Once a phone is connected and selected, the following may display: Recent Calls: Turn the MENU knob to highlight Recent Calls and press to select. Contacts: Turn the MENU knob to highlight Contacts and press to select. Keypad: Turn the MENU knob to highlight Keypad and press to select. Active Call: Turn the MENU knob to highlight Active Call and press to select and display the active call screen.

197 Infotainment System 7-25 Manage Phones: Turn the MENU knob to highlight Manage Phones and press to select. Making a Call Using Contacts and Recent Calls For cell phones that support the Contacts and Recent Calls feature, the Bluetooth system can use the contacts stored on your cell phone to make calls. See your cell phone manufacturer s user guide or contact your wireless provider to find out if this feature is supported by your phone. If the phone prompts to allow phone book download during the pairing process, select Always Accept and Allow. The phone book may not be available if not accepted. When a cell phone supports the phone book feature, the Contacts and Recent Calls menus are automatically available. The Contacts menu allows you to access the phone book stored in the cell phone to make a call. The Recent Calls menu allows you to access the phone numbers from the Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and Missed Calls menus on the cell phone to make a call. To make a call using the Contacts menu: 1. Turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button, or press the PHONE button on the faceplate. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Contacts and press to select. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the letter group and press to select. 4. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the contact and press to select. 5. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the desired number, then press the MENU knob to call the contact. To make a call using the Recent Calls menu: 1. From the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight Recent Calls and press to select. If necessary, select between Missed, Recent, and Sent calls by turning the MENU knob to highlight the desired screen button, then pressing the MENU knob to select it. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the contact or the phone number. 4. Press the MENU knob to call the contact.

198 7-26 Infotainment System Making a Call Using the Keypad To make a call: 1. Turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button. 2. Turn the MENU knob and press to select Keypad. 3. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the first digit and press to select. Continue this process through the number. To call, press the area just above the chrome bar and below the CALL screen button. Accepting or Declining a Call When an incoming call is received, the infotainment system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. Accepting a Call To accept a call, do one of the following:. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the ANSWER screen button.. Press g on the steering wheel controls. Declining a Call To decline a call, do one of the following:. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the IGNORE screen button.. Press c on the steering wheel controls or do nothing. Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. Accepting a Call Waiting Call To accept a call waiting call, do one of the following:. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the SWITCH screen button.. Press g on the steering wheel controls. Declining a Call Waiting Call To decline a call waiting call, do one of the following:. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the IGNORE screen button.. Press c on the steering wheel controls or do nothing

199 Infotainment System 7-27 Ending a Call To end a call, do one of the following:. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the END screen button.. Press c on the steering wheel controls. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers during a call. This is used when calling a menu-driven phone system. 1. Press the area just above the chrome bar and below the KEYPAD screen button. 2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight the first digit and press to select. If not initially in the phone application, from the Home Page, turn the MENU knob, then press to select the PHONE screen button. From the PHONE main menu, turn the MENU knob to highlight Active Call and press to select. Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) Using Voice Recognition To use voice recognition, press g on the steering wheel. Use the commands below for the various voice features. For additional information, say Help while you are in a voice recognition menu. Pairing A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone must be paired to the Bluetooth system and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls can be made using OnStar Hands-Free Calling, if available. See OnStar Overview on page Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be completed once, unless the pairing information on the cell phone changes or the cell phone is deleted from the system.. Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the Bluetooth system at a time.. If multiple paired cell phones are within range of the system, the system connects to the first available paired cell phone in the order that they were newly paired to the system. To link to a different paired phone, see Connecting to a Different Phone later in this section.

200 7-28 Infotainment System Pairing a Phone 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth. 3. Say Pair. The system responds with instructions and a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). The PIN is used in Step Start the pairing process on the cell phone that you want to pair. For help with this process, see your cell phone manufacturer's user guide. 5. Locate the device named Your Vehicle in the list on the cell phone. Follow the instructions on the cell phone to enter the PIN provided in Step 3. After the PIN is successfully entered, the system prompts you to provide a name for the paired cell phone. This name will be used to indicate which phones are paired and connected to the vehicle. The system responds with <Phone name> has been successfully paired after the pairing process is complete. 6. Repeat Steps 1 5 to pair additional phones. Listing All Paired and Connected Phones The system can list all cell phones paired to it. If a paired cell phone is also connected to the vehicle, the system responds with is connected after that phone name. 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth. 3. Say List. Deleting a Paired Phone If the phone name to delete is unknown, see Listing All Paired and Connected Phones. 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth. 3. Say Delete. The system asks for which phone to delete. 4. Say the name of the phone to delete. Connecting to a Different Phone To connect to a different cell phone, the Bluetooth system looks for the next available cell phone in the order in which all available cell phones were paired. This may need to be repeated depending on how many cell phones have been connected. 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth. 3. Say Change phone.. If another cell phone is found, the response will be <Phone name> is now connected.. If another cell phone is not found, the original phone remains connected.

201 Infotainment System 7-29 Storing and Deleting Phone Numbers The following commands are used to delete and store phone numbers. Store: This command will store a phone number, or a group of numbers as a name tag. Digit Store: This command allows a phone number to be stored as a name tag by entering the digits one at a time. Delete: This command is used to delete individual name tags. Delete All Name Tags: This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands-Free Calling Directory and the Destinations Directory. Using the Store Command 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Store. 3. Say the entire phone number or a group of digits all at once with no pauses, then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number. Using the Digit Store Command If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say Correction at any time to clear the last number. To hear all of the digits recognized by the system, say Verify at any time. 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Digit Store. 3. Say each digit, one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say Store, and then follow the directions given by the system to save a name tag for this number. Using the Delete Command 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Delete. 3. Say the name tag you want to delete. Using the Delete All Name Tags Command This command deletes all stored name tags in the Hands-Free Calling Directory and the Destinations Directory. To delete all name tags: 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Delete all name tags.

202 7-30 Infotainment System Listing Stored Numbers The list command will list all the stored numbers and name tags. Using the List Command 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Directory. 3. Say Hands-Free Calling. 4. Say List. Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands. Dial or Call: The dial or call command can be used interchangeably to dial a phone number or a stored name tag. Digit Dial: This command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time. Re-dial: This command is used to dial the last number used on the cell phone. Using the Dial or Call Command 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Dial or Call. 3. Say the entire number without pausing or say the name tag. Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers. Calling 911 Emergency 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Dial or Call. 3. Say Say Dial or Call. Using the Digit Dial Command The digit dial command allows a phone number to be dialed by entering the digits one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say Correction at any time to clear the last number. To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say Verify at any time. 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Digit Dial. 3. Say each digit, one at a time. After each digit is entered, the system repeats back the digit it heard followed by a tone. After the last digit has been entered, say Dial. Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers.

203 Infotainment System 7-31 Using the Re-dial Command 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say Re-dial. The system dials the last number called from the connected cell phone. Once connected, the person called will be heard through the audio speakers. Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received, the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.. Press g to answer the call.. Press c to ignore a call. Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier.. Press g to answer an incoming call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold.. Press g again to return to the original call.. To ignore the incoming call, no action is required.. Press c to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold. Three-Way Calling Three-way calling must be supported on the cell phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier. 1. While on a call, press g. 2. Say Three-way call. 3. Use the Dial or Call command to dial the number of the third party to be called. 4. Once the call is connected, press g to link all callers together. Ending a Call Press c to end a call. Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the Bluetooth system and the cell phone. The cell phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

204 7-32 Infotainment System To Transfer Audio from the Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle: 1. Press g. 2. Say Transfer Call. To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth System from a Cell Phone During a call with the audio on the cell phone, press g. The audio transfers to the vehicle. If the audio does not transfer to the vehicle, use the audio transfer feature on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide for more information. Voice Pass-Thru Voice pass-thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone. See your cell phone manufacturer's user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature. To access contacts stored in the cell phone: 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Bluetooth. 3. Say Voice. The system responds OK, accessing <phone name>. The cell phone's normal prompt messages will go through their cycle according to the phone's operating instructions. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tones The Bluetooth system can send numbers and the numbers stored as name tags during a call. You can use this feature when calling a menu-driven phone system. Account numbers can also be stored for use. Sending a Number or Name Tag During a Call 1. Press g. The system responds Ready, followed by a tone. 2. Say Dial. 3. Say the number or name tag to send. Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This includes all phone pairing information. For information on how to delete this information, see Deleting a Paired Phone.

205 Trademarks and License Agreements FCC Information See Radio Frequency Statement on page for more information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. Made for ipod and Made for iphone mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to ipod or iphone and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. ipod and iphone are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at SiriusXM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. Infotainment System 7-33 In Canada: Some deterioration of service may occur in extreme northern latitudes. This is beyond the control of SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Explicit Language Notice: Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available for SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers by notifying SiriusXM:. USA Customers Visit or call Canadian Customers Visit or call

206 7-34 Infotainment System It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or that support the SiriusXM website, the Online Service or any of its content. Furthermore, the AMBER voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. General Requirements: 1. A License Agreement from SiriusXM is required for any product that incorporates SiriusXM Technology and/or for use of any of the SiriusXM marks to be manufactured, distributed, or marketed in the SiriusXM service Area. 2. For products to be distributed, marketed, and/or sold in Canada, a separate agreement is required with Canadian Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as SiriusXM Canada).

207 Climate Controls 8-1 Climate Controls Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base) Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel) Air Vents Air Vents Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter Service Climate Control Systems Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Base) For vehicles with this system, it controls the heating, cooling, and ventilation. 1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls 2. Fan Control 3. AUTO (Automatic Operation) 4. Air Delivery Mode Control 5. OFF (Fan) 6. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature) 7. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped) 8. AC (Air Conditioning) 9. Defrost

208 8-2 Climate Controls 10. Rear Window Defogger 11. Recirculation Automatic Operation The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature. When the indicator light is on or AUTO is displayed on the screen, the system is in full automatic operation. If the air delivery mode or fan setting is manually adjusted, the auto indicator turns off and the display will show the selected settings. For automatic operation: 1. Press AUTO. 2. Set the temperature. Allow the system time to stabilize. Then adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort. To improve fuel efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather. The recirculation light will not come on. to select recirculation; press it again to select outside air. English units can be changed to metric units through the instrument cluster. See Settings under Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on or off. The temperature control and air delivery mode can still be adjusted. w / x (Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls): The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and the passenger. Press to increase or decrease the temperature. Press and hold to rapidly increase or decrease the temperature. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature): Press SYNC to link all climate zone settings to the driver settings. The SYNC indicator will be lit. Adjust the driver side temperature control to change the linked temperature. When the passenger settings are adjusted, the temperatures are unlinked and the SYNC indicator turns off. Manual Operation z 9 or 9 y (Fan Control): Press the fan control buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Press and hold the buttons to adjust speed more quickly. The fan speed setting displays. Pressing either button cancels automatic fan control and the fan can be controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. To turn off the fan, press OFF. z N y (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press the air delivery mode buttons to change the direction of the airflow. Selecting any of the air delivery modes cancels automatic air delivery control and the direction of the airflow can be controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.

209 Climate Controls 8-3 To change the current mode, select one of the following: Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets. [ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some air to the windshield and side windows. - (Defog): Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side windows and floor outlets. Some air may go to the rear floor outlets. 0 (Defrost): Press the 0 button to turn on or off. This clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and side windows, with some air to the rear floor. A/C (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning on or off. If the fan is turned off or the outside temperature falls below freezing, the air conditioner will not run. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation and the air conditioner runs as needed. When the indicator light is on, the air conditioner runs automatically to cool the air inside the vehicle or to dry the air needed to defog the windshield faster. Automatic Air Recirculation: When the AUTO indicator light is on, the air is automatically recirculated as needed to help quickly cool the inside of the (Recirculation): Press to alternate between recirculating air inside the vehicle or pulling in outside air. The indicator light on the button is lit when recirculation mode is active. This helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle or prevent outside air and odors from entering. Pressing this button cancels automatic recirculation. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation; recirculation runs automatically as needed. Manual recirculation mode is not available when in Defrost or Defog modes. Auto Defog: The climate control system may have a sensor to automatically detect high humidity inside the vehicle. When high humidity is detected, the climate control system may adjust to outside air supply and turn on the air conditioner. If the climate control system does not detect possible window fogging, it returns to normal operation. To turn Auto Defog off or on, see Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization on page 5 43.

210 8-4 Climate Controls Rear Window Defogger = REAR (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear window defogger turns off automatically after about 10 minutes. If turned on again it runs for about five minutes before turning off. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear window defogger may stay on continuously. The rear window defogger can be set to automatic operation. See Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization on page When Auto Rear Defog is selected, the rear window defogger turns on automatically when the interior temperature is cold and the outside temperature is about 4 C (40 F) and below. The auto rear defogger turns off automatically after about 10 minutes. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear window defogger may stay on continuously. The upper region of gridlines on the rear window are antenna lines and are not intended to heat when the defogger is activated. The heated outside mirrors turn on when the rear window defogger button is on. They help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors. Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect the radio's ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press M or L to heat the driver or passenger seat. See Heated Front Seats on page 3 8. Remote Start Climate Control Operation: For vehicles with the remote vehicle start feature, the climate control system may run when the vehicle is started remotely. The system uses the driver's previous settings to heat or cool the inside of the vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 9. The rear window defogger turns on if it is cold outside.

211 Climate Controls 8-5 Sensors Dual Automatic Climate Control System (Uplevel) The climate control buttons and the touch screen are used to adjust the heating, cooling, and ventilation. The solar sensor monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort. If the sensor is covered, the automatic climate control system may not work properly. 1. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls 2. Fan Control 3. OFF (Fan) 4. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped) Climate Control Buttons 5. AUTO (Automatic Operation) 6. Defrost 7. Rear Window Defogger 8. Recirculation

212 8-6 Climate Controls Climate Touch Screen Controls 1. Outside Air Temperature Display 2. Driver and Passenger Temperature Displays 3. Fan Control 4. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature) 5. AC Mode (Air Conditioning) 6. Climate Control Selection (Application Tray Button) 7. Air Delivery Mode Control Climate Control Touch Screen The fan, air delivery mode, A/C mode, and SYNC settings can be controlled by pressing CLIMATE on the infotainment home screen or the climate button in the touch screen application tray. A selection can then be made on the front climate control page displayed. See the infotainment manual. Climate Control Status Screen The climate control status screen appears briefly when the climate control buttons on the faceplate are adjusted. The air delivery mode can be adjusted on the climate control status screen. Automatic Operation The system automatically controls the fan speed, air delivery, air conditioning, and recirculation in order to heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature. When the indicator light is on or AUTO is displayed on the touch screen, the system is in full automatic operation. If the air delivery mode or fan setting is manually adjusted, the auto indicator turns off and the display will show the selected settings. Auto operation can be turned off individually for climate settings. For automatic operation: 1. Press AUTO. 2. Set the temperature. Allow the system time to stabilize. Then adjust the temperature as needed for best comfort.

213 Climate Controls 8-7 To improve fuel efficiency and to cool the vehicle faster, recirculation may be automatically selected in warm weather. The recirculation light will not come on. to select recirculation; press it again to select outside air. English units can be changed to metric units through the instrument cluster. See Settings under Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. OFF (Fan): Press to turn the fan on or off. The temperature control and air delivery mode can still be adjusted. w / x (Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls): The temperature can be adjusted separately for the driver and the passenger. Press to increase or decrease the temperature. Press and hold to rapidly increase or decrease the temperature. SYNC (Synchronized Temperature): Press SYNC on the touch screen to link all climate zone settings to the driver settings. Adjust the driver side temperature control to change the linked temperature. When the passenger settings are adjusted, the SYNC button is displayed when the temperatures are unlinked. Manual Operation z 9 or 9 y (Fan Control): Press the fan control buttons or the touch screen fan control, to increase or decrease the fan speed. Press and hold the buttons or the touch screen control to adjust speed more quickly. The fan speed setting displays. Pressing either button cancels automatic fan control and the fan can be controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. To turn off the fan and climate control system, press and hold the fan down button or touch screen fan control until it is off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Press the CLIMATE touch screen button to select climate control. Press the air delivery mode touch screen button to change the direction of the airflow. The selected air delivery mode button is lit. Pressing any of the air delivery buttons cancels automatic air delivery control and the direction of the airflow can be controlled manually. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation. To change the current mode, select one of the following: Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. \ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets. [ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some air to the windshield and side windows.

214 8-8 Climate Controls - (Defog): Clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, side windows and floor outlets. Some air may go to the rear floor outlets. 0 (Defrost): Press the 0 button to turn on or off. This clears the windshield of fog or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and side windows, with some air to the rear floor. A/C Mode (Air Conditioning): Press the A/C Mode touch screen control to turn the automatic air conditioning on or off. If the fan is turned off or the outside temperature falls below freezing, the air conditioner will not run. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation and the air conditioner runs as needed. Automatic Air Recirculation: When the AUTO indicator light is on, the air is automatically recirculated as needed to help quickly cool the inside of the vehicle. The climate control system may have a sensor to detect air pollution. In auto recirculation control, the Air Quality Control system may operate. To adjust the sensitivity of the Air Quality Control, see Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization on page 5 (Recirculation): Press to alternate between recirculating air inside the vehicle or pulling in outside air. The indicator light on the button is lit when recirculation mode is active. This helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle or prevent outside air and odors from entering. Pressing this button cancels automatic recirculation. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation; recirculation runs automatically as needed. Manual recirculation mode is not available when in Defrost or Defog modes. Auto Defog: The climate control system may have a sensor to automatically detect high humidity inside the vehicle. When high humidity is detected, the climate control system may adjust to outside air supply and turn on the air conditioner. If the climate control system does not detect possible window fogging, it returns to normal operation. To turn Auto Defog off or on, see Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization on page Rear Window Defogger = REAR (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear window defogger turns off automatically after about 10 minutes. If turned on again it runs for about five minutes before turning off. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear window defogger may stay on continuously.

215 Climate Controls 8-9 The rear window defogger can be set to automatic operation. See Climate and Air Quality under Vehicle Personalization on page When Auto Rear Defog is selected, the rear window defogger turns on automatically when the interior temperature is cold and the outside temperature is about 4 C (40 F) and below. The auto rear defogger turns off automatically after about 10 minutes. At higher vehicle speeds, the rear window defogger may stay on continuously. The upper gridlines on the rear window are antenna lines and are not intended to heat when the defogger is activated. The heated outside mirrors turn on when the rear window defogger button is on. They help to clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirrors. Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the front windshield and rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger grid and affect the radio's ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Driver and Passenger Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press J or z to heat the driver or passenger seat cushion and seatback. See Heated Front Seats on page 3 8. Remote Start Climate Control Operation: For vehicles with the remote vehicle start feature, the climate control system may run when the vehicle is started remotely. The system uses the driver's previous settings to heat or cool the inside of the vehicle. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2 9. The rear window defogger turns on if it is cold outside. Sensors The solar sensor monitors the solar heat. The climate control system uses the sensor information to adjust the temperature, fan speed, recirculation, and air delivery mode for best comfort. If the sensor is covered, the automatic climate control system may not work properly.

216 8-10 Climate Controls Air Vents Adjustable air vents are in the center and on the side of the instrument panel. Use the thumbwheels (1) near the air vents to open or close off the airflow. Move the slats (2) to change the direction of the airflow. Additional air vents are beneath the windshield and the driver side and passenger side door windows. These are fixed and cannot be adjusted. Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets at the base of the windshield that could block the flow of air into the vehicle.. Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects to help circulate the air inside the vehicle more effectively.. Use of non-gm approved hood deflectors can adversely affect the performance of the system. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle.. Do not attach any devices to the air vent slats. This restricts airflow and may cause damage to the air vents.

217 Maintenance Passenger Compartment Air Filter The filter removes dust, pollen, and other airborne irritants from outside air that is pulled into the vehicle. The filter should be replaced as part of routine scheduled maintenance. See Maintenance Schedule on page See your dealer regarding replacement of the filter. Service This vehicle may have the new environmentally friendly refrigerant, R1234yf. This refrigerant has a significantly reduced global warming impact on the environment, compared to the traditional automotive refrigerant, R-134a. All vehicles have a label underhood that identifies the refrigerant used in the vehicle. The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. The air conditioning evaporator should never be repaired or replaced by one from a salvage vehicle. It should only be replaced by a new evaporator to ensure proper and safe operation. Climate Controls 8-11 During service, all refrigerants should be reclaimed with proper equipment. Venting refrigerants directly to the atmosphere is harmful to the environment and may also create unsafe conditions based on inhalation, combustion, frostbite, or other health-based concerns.

218 8-12 Climate Controls 2 NOTES

219 Driving and Operating Driving Information Distracted Driving Defensive Driving Drunk Driving Control of a Vehicle Braking Steering Off-Road Recovery Loss of Control Racing or Other Competitive Driving Driving on Wet Roads Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads Winter Driving If the Vehicle Is Stuck Vehicle Load Limits Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In Ignition Positions Starting the Engine Engine Heater Retained Accessory Power (RAP) Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) Shifting out of Park Parking Parking over Things That Burn Engine Exhaust Engine Exhaust Running the Vehicle While Parked Automatic Transmission Automatic Transmission Manual Mode Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive Brakes Antilock Brake System (ABS) Parking Brake (Electric) Driving and Operating 9-1 Parking Brake (Manual) Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA) Ride Control Systems Traction Control System (TCS) StabiliTrak System Driver Mode Control Limited-Slip Rear Axle Cruise Control Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control Driver Assistance Systems Driver Assistance Systems Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing Assistance Systems for Driving Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System Active Emergency Braking System Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

220 9-2 Driving and Operating Fuel Fuel Recommended Fuel Gasoline Specifications California Fuel Requirements Fuels in Foreign Countries Fuel Additives Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Filling the Tank Filling a Portable Fuel Container Towing General Towing Information Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips Trailer Towing (With V6 Engine) Trailer Towing (With L4 Engine) Towing Equipment Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment Driving Information Distracted Driving Distraction comes in many forms and can take your focus from the task of driving. Exercise good judgment and do not let other activities divert your attention away from the road. Many local governments have enacted laws regarding driver distraction. Become familiar with the local laws in your area. To avoid distracted driving, always keep your eyes on the road, hands on the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in demanding driving situations. Use a hands-free method to place or receive necessary phone calls.. Watch the road. Do not read, take notes, or look up information on phones or other electronic devices.. Designate a front seat passenger to handle potential distractions.. Become familiar with vehicle features before driving, such as programming favorite radio stations and adjusting climate control and seat settings. Program all trip information into any navigation device prior to driving.. Wait until the vehicle is parked to retrieve items that have fallen to the floor.. Stop or park the vehicle to tend to children.. Keep pets in an appropriate carrier or restraint.. Avoid stressful conversations while driving, whether with a passenger or on a cell phone.

221 { WARNING Taking your eyes off the road too long or too often could cause a crash resulting in injury or death. Focus your attention on driving. Refer to the Infotainment manual and Infotainment section for more information on using that system, including pairing and using a cell phone Defensive Driving Defensive driving means always expect the unexpected. The first step in driving defensively is to wear the safety belt. See Safety Belts on page Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready.. Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you.. Focus on the task of driving. Drunk Driving Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. { WARNING Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious or even fatal collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Driving and Operating 9-3 Control of a Vehicle Braking, steering, and accelerating are important factors in helping to control a vehicle while driving. Braking Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time. Average driver reaction time is about three-quarters of a second. In that time, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m (66 ft), which could be a lot of distance in an emergency. Helpful braking tips to keep in mind include:. Keep enough distance between you and the vehicle in front of you.. Avoid needless heavy braking.. Keep pace with traffic.

222 9-4 Driving and Operating If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. Doing so could make the pedal harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will be some power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push. Steering Variable Effort Steering Some vehicles have a steering system that varies the amount of effort required to steer the vehicle in relation to the speed of the vehicle. The amount of steering effort required is less at slower speeds to make the vehicle more maneuverable and easier to park. At faster speeds, the steering effort increases to provide a sport-like feel to the steering. This provides maximum control and stability. If the vehicle seems harder to steer than normal when parking or driving slowly, there may be a problem with the system. You will still have power steering, but steering will be stiffer than normal at slow speeds. See your dealer for service. Electric Power Steering Your vehicle has electric power steering. It does not have power steering fluid. Regular maintenance is not required. If power steering assist is lost due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered, but may require increased effort. See your dealer if there is a problem. If the steering wheel is turned until it reaches the end of its travel and is held against that position for an extended period of time, power steering assist may be reduced. Normal use of the power steering assist should return when the system cools down. See specific vehicle steering messages under Vehicle Messages on page See your dealer if there is a problem. Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable speed.. Reduce speed before entering a curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady speed through the curve.. Wait until the vehicle is out of the curve before accelerating gently into the straightaway. Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when steering around a problem may be more effective than braking.. Holding both sides of the steering wheel allows you to turn 180 degrees without removing a hand.

223 Driving and Operating 9-5. Antilock Brake System (ABS) allows steering while braking. Off-Road Recovery The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. Follow these tips: 1. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle so that it straddles the edge of the pavement. 2. Turn the steering wheel about one-eighth of a turn, until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. 3. Turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Loss of Control Skidding There are three types of skids that correspond to the vehicle's three control systems:. Braking Skid wheels are not rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.. Acceleration Skid too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. If the vehicle starts to slide, follow these suggestions:. Ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and steer the way you want the vehicle to go. The vehicle may straighten out. Be ready for a second skid if it occurs.. Slow down and adjust your driving according to weather conditions. Stopping distance can be longer and vehicle control can be affected when traction is reduced by water, snow, ice, gravel, or other material on the road. Learn to recognize warning clues such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface and slow down when you have any doubt.

224 9-6 Driving and Operating. Try to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid. Racing or Other Competitive Driving Competitive driving may affect the vehicle warranty. See the warranty book before using the vehicle for competitive driving. Notice: Low oil levels can damage the engine. If using the vehicle for competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than it would with normal use. Check the oil level often during competitive driving. For 2.0L Turbo Engine Only:. Keep the level at or near 1 L (1 qt) above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick.. A 600 W fan in addition to the production option V03.. RON 104 premium fuel must be used with colder spark plugs. See your dealer. For 3.6L Engine Only:. Keep the level at or near 0.5 L (0.5 qt) above the upper mark that shows the proper operating range on the engine oil dipstick.. Install an engine oil cooler kit, including engine oil cooler lines and oil filter adapter.. Install a heavy duty fan. This requires electrical changes to the vehicle. Contact your dealer. Notice: Low oil levels can damage the engine. If using the vehicle for competitive driving, the engine may use more oil than it would with normal use. Check the oil level often during competitive driving. For vehicles equipped with front Brembo brake systems:. Performance/racing brake pads are required prior to racing or closed track driving. Vehicles with option code Y4Q have performance brake pads.. Before racing, replace existing brake fluid with a qualified racing brake fluid from a sealed container. Brake fluid with a dry boiling point >279 C (534 F) is qualified. If racing brake fluid is used, replace it with GM approved brake fluid before driving on public roads. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page Do not use silicone-based fluids.

225 Driving and Operating 9-7 If racing brake fluid is in the vehicle and the age of the brake fluid is over a month old or unknown, replace the brake fluid before racing/closed track driving.. The rear axle lubricant should be replaced with new lubricant.. Additional cooling capacity is also required for continuous competitive driving. Driving on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep standing or flowing water. { WARNING Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause the vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not ignore police warnings and be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water. Hydroplaning Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under the vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough. When the vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road. There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet. Other Rainy Weather Tips Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.

226 9-8 Driving and Operating. Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires on page Turn off cruise control. Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park the vehicle and rest. Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving scan the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments often. Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission.. Shift to a lower gear when going down steep or long hills. { WARNING If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. { WARNING Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down and they could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. Steering may also be affected when ignition is off. You could crash. Always have the engine running and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.. Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.. Be alert on top of hills; something could be in your lane (stalled car, accident).

227 Driving and Operating 9-9. Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks area, winding roads, long grades, passing or no-passing zones) and take appropriate action. Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 0 C (32 F) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more. The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves vehicle stability during hard stops on slippery roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement. Allow greater following distance on any slippery road and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering maneuvers and braking while on ice. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page Turn off cruise control, on slippery surfaces. Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use Roadside Service. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.

228 9-10 Driving and Operating { WARNING Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pipe.. Check again from time to time to be sure snow does not collect there.. Open a window about 5 cm (2 in) on the side of the vehicle that is away from the wind to bring in fresh air. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.. Adjust the climate control system to a setting that circulates the air inside the vehicle and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See Climate Control Systems in the Index. For more information about carbon monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. If the Vehicle Is Stuck Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. If stuck too severely for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off and use the rocking method. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 9 34.

229 Driving and Operating 9-11 { WARNING If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid going above 56 km/h (35 mph). Rocking the Vehicle to Get it Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. Turn off any traction system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a low forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing the Vehicle on page Vehicle Load Limits It is very important to know how much weight the vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on the vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification label. { WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle.

230 9-12 Driving and Operating Tire and Loading Information Label Label Example 1. Number of Occupant Seating Positions 2. Maximum Vehicle Capacity Weight 3. Size of the Original Equipment Tires 4. Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure A vehicle-specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and Loading Information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (1), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (2) in kilograms and pounds. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the tire size of the original equipment tires (3) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (4). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page and Tire Pressure on page There is also important loading information on the Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See Certification Label later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle's placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

231 Driving and Operating The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs ( (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. See Trailer Towing (With V6 Engine) on page 9 73 or Trailer Towing (With L4 Engine) on page 9 74 for important information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules, and trailering tips. Example 1 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). 2. Subtract Occupant 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 = 136 kg (300 lbs). 3. Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 317 kg (700 lbs).

232 9-14 Driving and Operating seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed the vehicle's capacity weight. Certification Label Example 2 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). 2. Subtract Occupant 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 = 340 kg (750 lbs). 3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg (250 lbs). Example 3 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). 2. Subtract Occupant 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs). 3. Available Cargo Weight = 0 kg (0 lbs). Refer to the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information label for specific information about the vehicle's capacity weight and Label Example A vehicle-specific Certification label is attached to the vehicle's center pillar (B-pillar). The label tells the gross weight capacity of the vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,

233 Driving and Operating 9-15 fuel, and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR for the vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. And, if there is a heavy load, it should be spread out. See Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit earlier in this section. { WARNING Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). This can cause systems to break and change the way the vehicle handles. This could cause loss of control and a crash. Overloading can also shorten the life of the vehicle. If you put things inside the vehicle like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going. { WARNING Things inside the vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.. Put things in the cargo area of the vehicle. In the cargo area, put them as far forward as possible. Try to spread the weight evenly. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.. Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in the vehicle.. Secure loose items in the vehicle.. Do not leave a seat folded down unless needed.

234 9-16 Driving and Operating Starting and Operating New Vehicle Break-In Follow these recommended guidelines during the first km (1,500 mi) of driving this vehicle. Parts have a break-in period and performance will be better in the long run. For the first km (1,500 mi):. Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.. Do not exceed 4000 engine rpm.. Avoid driving at any one constant speed, fast or slow.. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle when the engine speed will exceed 4000 rpm.. Do not let the engine labor. Never lug the engine in high gear at low speeds. With a manual transmission, shift to the next lower gear. This rule applies at all times, not just during the break-in period.. Check engine oil with every refueling and add if necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher than normal during the first km (1,500 mi).. New brake linings also need a break-in period. Avoid making hard stops during the first 322 km (200 mi). This is recommended every time brake linings are replaced. Ignition Positions The vehicle has an electronic keyless ignition with pushbutton start. Pressing the button cycles it through three modes: ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN/START, and Stopping the Engine/OFF.

235 Driving and Operating 9-17 The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter must be in the vehicle for the system to operate. If the pushbutton start is not working, the vehicle may be near a strong radio antenna signal causing interference to the keyless access system. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3. To shift out of P (Park), the vehicle must be in ON/RUN and the brake pedal must be applied. Stopping the Engine/OFF (No Indicator Lights): When the vehicle is stopped, press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to turn the engine off. If the vehicle is in P (Park), the ignition will turn off, and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page Automatic Transmission If the vehicle is not in P (Park), the ignition will return to ACC/ ACCESSORY and display a message in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Transmission Messages on page When the vehicle is shifted into P (Park), the ignition system will switch to OFF. Manual Transmission If the vehicle is stationary, the ignition will turn OFF, and Retained Accessory Power (RAP) will remain active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page The vehicle may have an electric steering column lock. The lock is activated when the vehicle is switched to OFF and either front door is opened. A sound may be heard as the lock actuates or releases. The steering column lock may not release with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, the vehicle may not start. Move the steering wheel from left to right while attempting to start the vehicle. If this does not work, the vehicle needs service. Do not turn the engine off when the vehicle is moving. This will cause a loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. If the vehicle must be shut off in an emergency: 1. Brake using a firm and steady pressure. Do not pump the brakes repeatedly. This may deplete power assist, requiring increased brake pedal force. 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). This can be done while the vehicle is moving. After shifting to N (Neutral), firmly apply the brakes and steer the vehicle to a safe location. 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift to P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

236 9-18 Driving and Operating 4. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page { WARNING Turning off the vehicle while moving may cause loss of power assist in the brake and steering systems and disable the airbags. While driving, only shut the vehicle off in an emergency. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over, and must be shut off while driving, press and hold the ENGINE START/ STOP button for longer than two seconds, or press twice within five seconds. ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber Indicator Light): This mode allows you to use some electrical accessories when the engine is off. With the ignition off, pressing the button one time without the brake pedal applied will place the ignition system in ACC/ACCESSORY. The ignition will switch from ACC/ ACCESSORY to OFF after five minutes to prevent battery rundown. ON/RUN/START (Green Indicator Light): This mode is for driving and starting. With the ignition off, and the brake pedal applied, pressing the button once will place the ignition system in ON/RUN/START. Once engine cranking begins, release the button. Engine cranking will continue until the engine starts. See Starting the Engine on page The ignition will then remain in ON/RUN. Service Only Mode This power mode is available for service and diagnostics, and to verify the proper operation of the malfunction indicator lamp as may be required for emission inspection purposes. With the vehicle off, and the brake pedal not applied, pressing and holding the button for more than five seconds will place the vehicle in Service Only Mode. The instruments and audio systems will operate as they do in ON/RUN, but the vehicle will not be able to be driven. The engine will not start in Service Only Mode. Push the button again to turn the vehicle off.

237 Driving and Operating 9-19 Starting the Engine Place the transmission in the proper gear. Automatic Transmission Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. To restart the vehicle when it is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped. Notice: If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Any resulting damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. See Add-On Electrical Equipment on page Manual Transmission The shift lever should be in Neutral and the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to the floor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not all the way down. Starting Procedure (Keyless Access) 1. If the vehicle has the keyless access system, the transmitter must be in the vehicle. Put your foot on the brake pedal and push the ENGINE START/STOP button. When the engine begins cranking, let go of the button. The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. If the transmitter is not in the vehicle or something is interfering with the transmitter, the Driver Information Center (DIC) will display a message. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3 and Key and Lock Messages on page If the battery in the keyless access transmitter needs replacing, a DIC message displays. The vehicle can still be driven. See Starting the Vehicle with a Low Transmitter Battery in Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2 3.

238 9-20 Driving and Operating The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the START button is pressed, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the button is pressed for many seconds, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents cranking if the engine is already running. Engine cranking can be stopped by pressing the START button a second time. Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of time, by pressing the START button immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat and damage the cranking motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to let the cranking motor cool down. 2. If the engine does not start after five to 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 18 C or 0 F), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you press the START button, for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the button and the accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts. Engine Heater Vehicles with the engine coolant heater can use this option in cold weather conditions at or below 18 C (0 F) for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above 18 C (0 F).

239 Driving and Operating 9-21 To Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord is clipped to the diagonal brace on the passenger side of the engine compartment. 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet. { WARNING Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged. Contact your dealer for information on how long to use the heater in your particular area. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) These accessories can be used after the engine is turned off:. Audio system (up to 10 minutes or driver door is opened).. Power windows, sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets (up to 10 minutes or any door is opened). Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) Use this procedure to shift into P (Park): 1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking brake. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle. 3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. 4. Take the keyless access transmitter with you.

240 9-22 Driving and Operating Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running (Automatic Transmission) { WARNING It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. It could overheat and catch fire. It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on page (Continued) WARNING (Continued) If you are towing a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake set. After shifting into P (Park), try to move the shift lever without first pushing the button on the shift lever. If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked into P (Park). Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission) Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission. This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park). To find out how, see "Shifting Into Park" listed previously. If torque lock does occur, the vehicle may need to be pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park). Shifting out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery. If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page

241 Driving and Operating 9-23 To shift out of P (Park): 1. Apply the brake pedal. 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. 3. Release the parking brake. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page Press the shift lever button. 5. Move the shift lever. If unable to shift out of P (Park): 1. Fully release the shift lever button. 2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift lever button again. 3. Move the shift lever. If the shift lever will not move from P (Park), consult your dealer or a professional towing service. Parking If the vehicle has a manual transmission, before getting out of the vehicle, move the shift lever into R (Reverse) if parking on a downhill slope. On a level surface or an uphill slope, use 1 (First) gear. Apply the parking brake. Turn the wheels toward the curb for a downhill slope, or away from the curb for an uphill slope. Once the shift lever has been placed into gear with the clutch pedal pressed in, turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF, and release the clutch. If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle is pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page Parking over Things That Burn { WARNING Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that can burn.

242 9-24 Driving and Operating Engine Exhaust { WARNING Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).. The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different.. The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage.. The vehicle exhaust system has been modified, damaged, or improperly repaired. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or aftermarket modifications that are not completely sealed. If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:. Drive it only with the windows completely down.. Have the vehicle repaired immediately. Never park the vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation. Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. If the vehicle is left with the engine running, follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not move. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 9 21 and Engine Exhaust on page If the vehicle has a manual transmission, see Parking on page If parking on a hill and pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 70.

243 Driving and Operating 9-25 Automatic Transmission P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. Use this position when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. { WARNING It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 9 21 and Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system. Fully apply the regular brakes first and then press the shift lever button before shifting from P (Park) with the ignition in ON/ RUN. If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting out of Park on page Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle is stopped. R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up. At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) can be used to rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand without damaging the transmission. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9 10.

244 9-26 Driving and Operating N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. You can also use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. { WARNING Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle. D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides the best fuel economy. If you need more power for passing, and you are:. Going less than 55 km/h (35 mph), push the accelerator pedal about halfway down.. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) or more, push the accelerator all the way down. The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and have more power. Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions could result in skidding; see Skidding under Loss of Control on page 9 5. Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place. Manual Mode Driver Shift Control (DSC) Notice: Driving with the engine at a high rpm without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control (DSC), could damage the vehicle. Always upshift when necessary while using DSC. Vehicles with DSC may either use the shift lever or the tap shift controls on the back of the steering wheel (if equipped) to manually shift the automatic transmission.

245 Driving and Operating 9-27 To use DSC using the shift lever: 1. Move the shift lever to the left from D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode). The transmission will be in Manual Mode and will hold the current gear. 2. Move the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward to downshift. 3. To cancel DSC, move the shift lever back to D (Drive). Tap Shift If equipped, the tap shift controls are on the back of the steering wheel. To use DSC using the tap shift controls: 1. Move the shift lever to the left from D (Drive) to M (Manual Mode). The transmission will be in Manual Mode and will hold the current gear. 2. Pull the control toward you to shift. Pull the left control to ( ) downshift, and the right control to (+) upshift. 3. To cancel DSC, move the shift lever back to D (Drive). Tap Shift Mode can also be used temporarily while driving in D (Drive). Pull either the (+) upshift or ( ) downshift control. To cancel Tap Shift Mode, hold the (+) upshift control for two seconds. If no action is taken, the vehicle returns to automatic shifting after a brief period of driving at a steady speed, or when the vehicle comes to a stop. While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have firmer, quicker shifting. This can be used for sport driving, climbing or descending hills, staying in gear longer, downshifting for more power, or engine braking.

246 9-28 Driving and Operating The transmission will only allow shifting into gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine revolutions per minute (rpm). The transmission will not automatically shift to the next lower or higher gear if the engine rpm is too high or too low. If shifting is prevented for any reason, a DIC message will appear. See Transmission Messages on page When accelerating the vehicle from a stop in snowy and icy conditions, it is suggested to shift into second gear. A higher gear allows the vehicle to gain more traction on slippery surfaces. See Driver Mode Control on page Manual Transmission If the vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift lever is located on the center console between the front seats. 1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal while pressing on the accelerator pedal. After a complete stop, if it is hard to shift into 1 (First), let up on the clutch pedal, then press it back down and shift into 1 (First). 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal and let up on the accelerator pedal, then shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal while accelerating. 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) the same as 2 (Second). To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral. Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle the engine. The shift lever is in Neutral when it is centered in the shift pattern, not in any gear. R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal, completely stop the vehicle, and shift into R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

247 { WARNING If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could lose control of the vehicle. You could injure yourself or others. Do not shift down more than one gear at a time when you downshift. Notice: If you skip more than one gear when you downshift, or if you race the engine when you release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the transmission. Do not skip gears or race the engine when downshifting. Drive Systems All-Wheel Drive Vehicles with this feature always send engine power to all four wheels. It is fully automatic, and adjusts itself as needed for road conditions. Driving and Operating 9-29 Brakes Antilock Brake System (ABS) This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal moves a little. This is normal. If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 5 20.

248 9-30 Driving and Operating If driving safely on a wet road and it becomes necessary to slam on the brakes and continue braking to avoid a sudden obstacle, a computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each wheel. ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly. Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS. Using ABS Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let ABS work. You might hear the ABS pump or motor operating and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal. Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking. Parking Brake (Electric) Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission

249 Driving and Operating 9-31 The vehicle may have an Electric Parking Brake (EPB). The switch for the EPB is on the center console for vehicles with a manual transmission, or on the left side of the instrument panel for vehicles with an automatic transmission. The EPB can always be activated, even if the ignition is off. To prevent draining the battery, avoid repeated cycles of the EPB system when the engine is not running. The system has a parking brake status light and a parking brake warning light. See Parking Brake Light on page 5 19 and Service Electric Parking Brake Light on page There are also parking brake related Driver Information Center (DIC) messages. See Brake System Messages on page In case of insufficient electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released. Before leaving the vehicle, check the parking brake status light to ensure that the parking brake is applied. EPB Apply The EPB can be applied any time the vehicle is stopped. The EPB is applied by momentarily lifting up on the EPB switch. Once fully applied, the parking brake status light will be on. While the brake is being applied, the status light will flash until it is fully applied. If the light does not come on, or remains flashing, you need to have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive the vehicle if the parking brake status light is flashing. See your dealer. See Parking Brake Light on page If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is in motion, a chime will sound, and a DIC message will be displayed. The vehicle will decelerate as long as the switch is held in the up position. Releasing the EPB switch during deceleration will release the parking brake. If the switch is held in the up position until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will remain applied. If the parking brake status light flashes continuously, then the EPB is only partially applied or released, or there is a problem with the EPB. A DIC message will be displayed. If this light flashes continuously, release the EPB, and attempt to apply it again. If this light continues to flash, do not drive the vehicle. See your dealer. If the parking brake warning light is on, the EPB has detected an internal error, or a fault in another system, and is operating with reduced functionality. To apply the EPB when this light is on, lift up on the EPB switch and hold it in the up position. Full application of the parking brake by the EPB system may take a longer period of time than normal when this light is on. Continue to hold the switch until the parking brake status light remains on. If the parking brake warning light is on, see your dealer.

250 9-32 Driving and Operating The vehicle may automatically apply the EPB in some situations when the vehicle is not moving. This is normal, and is done to periodically check the correct operation of the EPB system. If the EPB fails to apply, the rear wheels should be blocked to prevent vehicle movement. EPB Release To release the EPB, place the ignition in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position, apply and hold the brake pedal, and push down momentarily on the EPB switch. If you attempt to release the EPB without the brake pedal applied, a chime will sound, and a DIC message will be displayed. The EPB is released when the parking brake status light is off. If the parking brake warning light is on, the EPB has detected an error in another system and is operating with reduced functionality. To release the EPB when this light is on, push down on the EPB switch and hold it in the down position. EPB release may take a longer period of time than normal when this light is on. Continue to hold the switch until the parking brake status light is off. If the light is on, see your dealer. Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. Automatic EPB Release The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is running, placed into gear, and an attempt is made to drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB is applied, to preserve parking brake lining life. The EPB can also be used to prevent roll back for vehicles with a manual transmission taking off on a hill. In a situation where no roll back is desired, an applied EPB will allow both feet to be used for the clutch and accelerator pedals in preparation for starting the vehicle moving in the intended direction. In this situation, perform the normal clutch and/or accelerator actions required to begin moving the vehicle. There is no need to push the switch to release the EPB. If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle is pulling a trailer, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page 9 70.

251 Driving and Operating 9-33 Parking Brake (Manual) To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the parking brake pedal. If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light will be on and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips on page Brake Assist This vehicle has a brake assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsation or pedal movement during this time is normal and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates. The brake assist feature will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.

252 9-34 Driving and Operating Hill Start Assist (HSA) This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature, which may be useful when the vehicle is stopped on a grade. This feature is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling, either forward or rearward, during vehicle drive off. After the driver completely stops and holds the vehicle in a complete standstill on a grade, HSA will be automatically activated. During the transition period between when the driver releases the brake pedal and starts to accelerate to drive off on a grade, HSA holds the braking pressure to ensure that there is no rolling. The brakes will automatically release when the accelerator pedal is applied within the two-second window. It will not activate if the vehicle is in a drive gear and facing downhill, or if the vehicle is facing uphill and in R (Reverse). Ride Control Systems Traction Control System (TCS) The vehicle has TCS, which limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an all wheel drive vehicle, the system will operate if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to limit wheel spin. The system may be heard or felt while it is working, but this is normal. TCS is on whenever the vehicle is started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, the system should always be left on. But, TCS can be turned off if needed. TCS/StabiliTrak Light d flashes to indicate that the TCS is active. If there is a problem detected with TCS, a message may be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Ride Control System Messages on page When one of these messages is displayed and d comes on and stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive but the system is not operational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.

253 Driving and Operating 9-35 If d comes on and stays on, reset the system: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 seconds. 3. Start the engine. If d still comes on and stays on at a speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see your dealer for service. A chime may also sound when the light comes on steady. Notice: Do not repeatedly brake or accelerate heavily when TCS is off. The vehicle's driveline could be damaged. Manual Transmission TCS/ StabiliTrak Button Shown, Automatic Transmission TCS/ StabiliTrak Button Similar TCS Off Light TCS can be turned off by pressing and releasing g. When TCS is turned off, i comes on and the system will not limit wheel spin. Driving should be adjusted accordingly. Press and release g again to turn the system back on. It may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page See also Winter Driving on page 9 9 for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy conditions. If cruise control is being used when TCS activates, cruise control will automatically disengage. Press the cruise control button to reengage when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page Adding non-gm accessories can affect the vehicle's performance. See Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3.

254 9-36 Driving and Operating StabiliTrak System The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a difference between the intended path, and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to help steer the vehicle in the intended direction. StabiliTrak is on automatically whenever the vehicle is started. To assist with directional control of the vehicle, the system should always be left on. TCS/StabiliTrak Light When the stability control system activates, d flashes on the instrument cluster. This also occurs when traction control is activated. A noise may be heard or vibration may be felt in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steer the vehicle in the intended direction. If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a message is displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Ride Control System Messages on page When one of these messages is displayed and/or d comes on and stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive but the system is not operational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly. If d comes on and stays on, reset the system: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 seconds. 3. Start the engine. If d still comes on and stays on at a speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see your dealer for service.

255 Driving and Operating 9-37 Manual Transmission TCS/ StabiliTrak Button Shown, Automatic Transmission TCS/ StabiliTrak Button Similar StabiliTrak Off Light TCS Off Light StabiliTrak and traction control can be turned off if needed by pressing and holding g until g and i come on in the instrument cluster. When StabiliTrak is turned off, the system will not assist with directional control of the vehicle or limit wheel spin. Driving should be adjusted accordingly. Press and release g again to turn both systems back on. If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates, cruise control will automatically disengage. Press the cruise control button to reengage when road conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page Driver Mode Control Driver Mode Control attempts to add a sportier feel, provide a more comfortable ride, or assist in different weather conditions or terrain. This system simultaneously changes the software calibration of various sub-systems. Depending on the option package, available features, and mode selected, the suspension, steering, and powertrain will change calibrations to achieve the desired mode characteristics. If the vehicle is equipped with MagneRide, selecting the various Driver Modes adjusts the ride of the vehicle to enhance the ride performance for the road conditions and the selected mode. Manual Transmission Mode Button Shown, Automatic Transmission Mode Button Similar The Driver Mode Control has three modes: Tour, Sport, and Snow/Ice. Snow/Ice mode is only available on automatic transmission vehicles.

256 9-38 Driving and Operating Press the MODE button on the center console to make a mode selection. The first press of the button will show the current mode. Subsequent presses will scroll though the available modes. The Tour and Sport modes will feel similar on a smooth road. Select a new setting whenever driving conditions change. Tour Mode Use for normal city and highway driving to provide a smooth, soft ride. Sport Mode Use where road conditions or personal preference demand a more controlled response. When selected, the Sport mode indicator will display in the Driver Information Center (DIC). When in Sport mode, the vehicle will still shift automatically. The transmission may remain in gear longer than it would in the normal driving mode based on braking, throttle input, and vehicle lateral acceleration. The steering will change to provide more precise control. If the vehicle has MagneRide, the suspension will change to provide better cornering performance. Snow/Ice Mode Use when more traction is needed during slippery conditions. The transmission will use 2 (Second) gear instead of 1 (First) gear when accelerating from a stop. The vehicle will upshift normally when the vehicle is moving. When selected, the Snow/Ice mode indicator will display in the DIC. This feature is not intended for use when the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice, snow or gravel. If the vehicle becomes stuck, see If the Vehicle Is Stuck on page Limited-Slip Rear Axle Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand, or gravel. When traction is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle. The limited-slip rear axle also gives the driver enhanced control when cornering hard or completing a maneuver, such as a lane change. Limited-slip rear axle fluid should be changed at intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule on page 11 3.

257 Driving and Operating 9-39 Cruise Control { WARNING Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph). If the brakes are applied, the cruise control disengages. For vehicles with a manual transmission, the cruise control will remain active when the gears are shifted. The cruise is deactivated if the clutch is depressed for several seconds. If the StabiliTrak system begins to limit wheel spin while using cruise control, the cruise control automatically disengages. See StabiliTrak System on page 9 36 or Traction Control System (TCS) on page When road conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used, you can apply the cruise control again. J (On/Off): Press to turn the system on and off. A white cruise control indicator appears in the instrument cluster when cruise is turned on.

258 9-40 Driving and Operating +RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press the control up briefly to resume to a previously set speed or to increase vehicle speed if the cruise control is already activated. To increase speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press +RES up to the first detent. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press +RES up to the second detent. SET (Set/Coast): Press the control down briefly to set the speed and activate cruise control or to decrease vehicle speed if the cruise control is already activated. To decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET down to the first detent. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press SET down to the second detent. * (Cancel): Press to disengage cruise control without erasing the set speed from memory. Setting Cruise Control If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the cruise control button off when cruise is not being used. 1. Press J. 2. Get up to the desired speed. 3. Press and release the SET control on the steering wheel. 4. Remove foot from the accelerator. When the cruise control has been set to the desired speed, the cruise control indicator appears green on the instrument cluster and a cruise set speed message appears on the Head-Up Display (HUD), if equipped. Resuming a Set Speed If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory. Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, press +RES up to the first detent briefly on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed. Increasing Speed While Cruise Control is at a Set Speed If the cruise control system is already activated:. Press and hold +RES up until the desired speed is reached, then release it.. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press +RES up to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.. To increase vehicle speed in larger increments, press +RES up to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer.

259 Driving and Operating 9-41 The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. The increment value used depends on the units displayed. Reducing Speed While Cruise Control is at a Set Speed If the cruise control system is already activated:. Press and hold SET down until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.. To decrease the vehicle speed in small increments, press SET down to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.. To decrease the vehicle speed in larger increments, press SET down to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer. The cruise control system may automatically brake to slow the vehicle down. The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. The increment value used depends on the units displayed. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. While pressing the accelerator pedal to override cruise, briefly applying the set switch will result in cruise set to the current vehicle speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When going downhill, the cruise control system may automatically brake to slow the vehicle down. Also, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. If the brake is applied, the cruise control disengages. Ending Cruise Control There are four ways to end cruise control:. Step lightly on the brake pedal (manual and automatic transmissions).. Depress the clutch pedal for several seconds or shift to Neutral (manual transmissions).. Press *.. Press J. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if J is pressed or if the ignition is turned off.

260 9-42 Driving and Operating Adaptive Cruise Control For vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), it allows the driver to select the cruise control set speed and following gap. Read this entire section before using this system. The following gap is the following time between your vehicle and a vehicle detected directly ahead in your path moving in the same direction. If no vehicle is detected in your path, ACC works like regular cruise control. ACC uses camera and radar sensors. See Radio Frequency Statement on page for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. If a vehicle is detected in your path, ACC can apply acceleration or limited, moderate braking to maintain the selected following gap. To disengage ACC, apply the brake. If ACC is controlling your vehicle speed when the Traction Control System (TCS) activates, the ACC will automatically disengage. See Traction Control System (TCS) on page When road conditions allow ACC to be safely used, the ACC can be turned back on. { WARNING ACC has limited braking ability and may not have time to slow the vehicle down enough to avoid a collision with another vehicle you are following. This can occur when vehicles suddenly slow or stop ahead, or enter your lane. Also see Alerting the Driver in this section. Complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. See Defensive Driving on page 9 3. { WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control will not detect or brake for children, pedestrians, animals, or other objects. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when:. On winding and hilly roads or when the sensors are blocked by snow, ice, or dirt. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead. Keep the entire front of the vehicle clean.. Visibility is low, such as in fog, rain, or snow conditions. Adaptive Cruise Control performance is limited under these conditions.. On slippery roads where fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip.

261 Driving and Operating 9-43 ] (On/Off): Press to turn the system on or off. +RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press the control up briefly to resume the previous set speed or to increase vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To increase speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press +RES up to the first detent. To increase speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press +RES up to the second detent. SET (Set/Coast): Press the control down briefly to set the speed and activate ACC or to decrease vehicle speed if ACC is already activated. To decrease speed by 1 km/h (1 mph), press SET down to the first detent. To decrease speed to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer, press SET down to the second detent. * (Cancel): Press to disengage ACC without erasing the set speed from memory. 3 (Follow Distance Gap): Press to select a following gap time (or distance) setting for ACC of Far, Medium, or Near. Setting Adaptive Cruise Control If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the cruise control button off when cruise is not being used. Select the set speed desired for cruise. This is the vehicle speed when no vehicle is detected in its path slower than the set speed. ACC will not set or resume at a speed less than 40 km/h (25 mph). To set ACC: 1. Press ]. 2. Get up to the desired speed. 3. Press and release the SET control on the steering wheel. 4. Remove foot from the accelerator. After ACC is set, it may immediately apply the brakes if a vehicle ahead is detected closer than the selected following gap.

262 9-44 Driving and Operating The ACC indicator displays in the instrument cluster and Head-Up Display (HUD). When the ACC is active, the indicator will be lit green. Be mindful of speed limits, surrounding traffic speeds, and weather conditions when selecting the set speed. Resuming a Set Speed If the ACC is set at a desired speed and then the brakes are applied, the ACC is disengaged without erasing the set speed from memory. To begin using ACC again, press +RES up briefly on the steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set speed. Increasing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:. Use the accelerator to get to the higher speed. Press SET down. Release the control and the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the higher speed. When the accelerator pedal is pressed, ACC will not brake because it is overridden. A warning message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the Head-Up Display (HUD). See Cruise Control Messages on page Press and hold +RES up until the desired set speed appears on the display, then release it.. To increase vehicle speed in small increments, press +RES up to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes 1 km/h (1 mph) faster.. To increase vehicle speed in larger increments, press +RES up to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed increases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer. When it is determined that there is no vehicle ahead inside the selected following gap, then the vehicle speed will increase to the set speed. The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. The increment value used depends on the units displayed. Reducing Speed While ACC is at a Set Speed If ACC is already activated, do one of the following:. Use the brake to get to the desired lower speed. Press SET down and release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will now cruise at the lower speed.

263 Driving and Operating Press and hold SET down until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it.. To decrease the vehicle speed in small increments, press SET down to the first detent. For each press, the vehicle goes about 1 km/h (1 mph) slower.. To decrease the vehicle speed in larger increments, press SET down to the second detent. For each press, the vehicle speed decreases to the next 5 km/h (5 mph) mark on the speedometer. The speedometer reading can be displayed in either English or metric units. See Instrument Cluster on page 5 9. The increment value used depends on the units displayed. Selecting the Follow Distance When a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead within the selected following gap, ACC will adjust the vehicle's speed and attempt to maintain the follow distance gap selected. Press 3 on the steering wheel to adjust the following gap. Each press cycles the gap button through three settings: Far, Medium, or Near. When pressed, the current gap setting displays briefly on the instrument cluster and HUD. The gap setting will be maintained until it is changed. Since each gap setting corresponds to a following time (Far, Medium, or Near), the following distance will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the further back your vehicle will follow a vehicle detected ahead. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the following gap. The range of selectable gaps may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. Changing the gap setting automatically changes the alert timing sensitivity (Far, Medium, or Near) for the Forward Collision Alert (FCA) feature. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System on page Alerting the Driver If ACC is engaged, driver action may be required when:. ACC cannot apply sufficient braking because of approaching a vehicle too rapidly.. A temporary condition prohibits ACC from operating. See Vehicle Messages on page A malfunction is detected in the system. See Vehicle Messages on page 5 32.

264 9-46 Driving and Operating When any of these conditions occur, the collision alert symbol on the HUD will flash on the windshield. Either eight beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. See Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization on page See Defensive Driving on page 9 3. Approaching and Following a Vehicle The vehicle ahead symbol is in the instrument cluster and HUD display. The vehicle ahead symbol only displays when a vehicle is detected in your vehicle s path moving in the same direction. If this symbol is not displaying, ACC will not respond to or brake to vehicles ahead. ACC automatically slows the vehicle down and adjusts vehicle speed to follow the vehicle in front at the selected follow gap. The vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow the vehicle in front of you, but will not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking, if necessary. When braking is active, the brake lamps will come on. The automatic braking may feel or sound different than if the brakes were applied manually. This is normal. Stationary or Very Slow-Moving Objects { WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) may not detect and react to stopped or slow-moving vehicles ahead of you. For example, the system may not brake for a (Continued) WARNING (Continued) vehicle that it has never detected moving. This can occur in stop-and-go traffic or when a vehicle suddenly appears due to a vehicle ahead changing lanes. Your vehicle may not stop and could cause a crash. Use caution when using ACC. Your complete attention is always required while driving and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes. ACC Automatically Disengages ACC may automatically disengage and the driver will need to manually apply the brakes to slow the vehicle when:. The sensors are blocked.. No traffic or other objects are being detected.. There is a fault in the system.

265 Driving and Operating 9-47 The ACC active symbol will not be displayed when ACC is no longer active. Notification to Resume ACC ACC will maintain a follow gap behind a detected vehicle and slow your vehicle to a stop behind that vehicle. If the stopped vehicle ahead has driven away and ACC has not resumed, the vehicle ahead symbol will flash as a reminder to check traffic before proceeding. In addition, the left and right sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three times, or three beeps will sound. See Alert Type and Go Notifier in Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization on page When the vehicle ahead drives away, press RES+ or the accelerator pedal to resume ACC. If stopped for more than two minutes or if the driver door is opened and the driver seat belt is unbuckled, the ACC automatically applies the electric parking brake to hold the vehicle. The electric parking brake status light will turn on. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page To resume ACC and release the electric parking brake, press the accelerator pedal and then RES+. { WARNING If ACC has stopped the vehicle, and if ACC is disengaged, turned off, or canceled, the vehicle will no longer be held at a stop. The vehicle can move. When ACC is holding the vehicle at a stop, always be prepared to manually apply the brakes. { WARNING Leaving the vehicle without placing it in P (Park) can be dangerous. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held at a stop by ACC. Always place the vehicle in P (Park) and turn off the ignition before leaving the vehicle.

266 9-48 Driving and Operating ACC Override If using the accelerator pedal while ACC is active, a DIC warning message will indicate that automatic braking will not occur. See Vehicle Messages on page ACC will resume operation when the accelerator pedal is not being pressed. { WARNING The ACC will not automatically apply the brakes if your foot is resting on the accelerator pedal. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you. Curves in the Road { WARNING On curves, ACC may not detect a vehicle ahead in your lane. You could be startled if the vehicle accelerates up to the set speed, especially when following a vehicle exiting or entering exit ramps. You could lose control of the vehicle or crash. Do not use ACC while driving on an entrance or exit ramp. Always be ready to use the brakes if necessary. { WARNING On curves, ACC may respond to a vehicle in another lane, or may not have time to react to a vehicle in your lane. You could crash into a vehicle ahead of you, or lose control of your vehicle. Give extra attention in curves and be ready to use the brakes if necessary. Select an appropriate speed while driving in curves. ACC may operate differently in a sharp curve. It may reduce the vehicle speed if the curve is too sharp.

267 Driving and Operating 9-49 When following a vehicle and entering a curve, ACC may not detect the vehicle ahead and accelerate to the set speed. When this happens the vehicle ahead symbol will not appear. ACC may detect a vehicle that is not in your lane and apply the brakes. ACC may occasionally provide an alert and/or braking that is considered unnecessary. It could respond to vehicles in different lanes, signs, guardrails, and other stationary objects when entering or exiting a curve. This is normal operation. The vehicle does not need service. Other Vehicle Lane Changes ACC will not detect a vehicle ahead until it is completely in the lane. The brake may need to be manually applied. Do Not Use ACC on Hills and When Towing a Trailer Do not use ACC when driving on steep hills or when towing a trailer. ACC will not detect a vehicle in the lane while driving on steep hills. The driver will often need to take over acceleration and braking on steep hills, especially when towing a trailer. If the brakes are applied, the ACC disengages.

268 9-50 Driving and Operating Ending ACC There are three ways to disengage ACC:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.. Press *.. Press ]. Erasing Speed Memory The cruise control set speed is erased from memory if ] is pressed or if the ignition is turned off. Cleaning the Sensing System The camera sensor on the back of the rearview mirror and the radar sensors on the front of the vehicle can become blocked by snow, ice, dirt, or mud. These areas need to be cleaned for ACC to operate properly. For cleaning instructions, see Washing the Vehicle under Exterior Care on page System operation may also be limited under snow, heavy rain, or road spray conditions. Driver Assistance Systems This vehicle may have features that work together to help avoid crashes or reduce crash damage while driving, backing, and parking. Read this entire section before using these systems. { WARNING Do not rely on the Driver Assistance Systems. These systems do not replace the need for paying attention and driving safely. You may not hear or feel alerts or warnings provided by these systems. Failure to use proper care when driving may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. See Defensive Driving on page 9 3. (Continued)

269 WARNING (Continued) Under many conditions, these systems will not:. Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.. Detect vehicles or objects outside the area monitored by the system.. Work at all driving speeds.. Warn you or provide you with enough time to avoid a crash.. Work under poor visibility or bad weather conditions.. Work if the detection sensor is not cleaned or is covered by ice, snow, mud, or dirt. Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes. Audible or Safety Alert Seat Some driver assistance features alert the driver of obstacles by beeping. To change the volume of the warning chime, see Comfort and Convenience under Vehicle Personalization on page If equipped with the Safety Alert Seat, the driver seat cushion may provide a vibrating pulse alert instead of beeping. To change this, see Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization on page Driving and Operating 9-51 Assistance Systems for Parking or Backing When the vehicle is in R (Reverse), the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) and Rear Parking Assist may help the driver to avoid a crash or to reduce crash damage. Some models may also have the Rear Automatic Braking and Backing Warning System, Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), and/or Front Parking Assist. When the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse), the RVC displays an image of the area behind the vehicle in the center stack display. When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), the screen returns to the previous content, after a short delay. To see this screen sooner, press one of the radio buttons. If the message Service Rear Camera System is displayed, the vehicle may need service.

270 9-52 Driving and Operating { WARNING The RVC system does not display children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or any other object located outside the camera's field of view, below the bumper, or under the vehicle. Perceived distances may be different from actual distances. Do not back the vehicle using only the RVC screen, during longer, higher speed backing maneuvers, or where there could be cross traffic. Failure to use proper care before backing may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Always check behind and around the vehicle before backing. 1. View Displayed by the Camera 1. View Displayed by the Camera 2. Corners of the Rear Bumper Displayed images may be farther or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper do not display. A warning triangle may display on the RVC screen to show where the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) has detected an object. This triangle changes from amber to red and increases in size the closer the object. On vehicles with the Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), a triangle with an arrow may also display on the RVC screen to warn of traffic coming from either direction. This system detects objects coming from up to 30 m (98 ft) from the left or right side behind the vehicle. When an object is detected, either three beeps sound from the left or right side or three Safety Alert Seat pulses occur on the left or right side, depending on the direction of the detected vehicle.

271 Driving and Operating 9-53 Use caution while backing up when towing a trailer, as the RCTA detection zones that extend out from the back of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. With URPA, as the vehicle backs up at speeds of less than 8 km/h (5 mph), the sensors on the rear bumper detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle that are within a zone 25 cm (10 in) high off the ground and below bumper level. { WARNING The parking assist system does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects located below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. It is not available at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with parking assist, always check the (Continued) WARNING (Continued) area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before moving forward or backing. The instrument cluster parking assist display has bars that show distance to object and object location information for URPA, and on some vehicles, for the Front Parking Assist system. As the object gets closer, more bars light up and the bars change color from yellow to amber to red. When an object is first detected in the rear, one beep will be heard from the rear, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse two times. When an object is very close (<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear, or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front), five beeps will sound from the front or rear depending where the object is detected, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. Beeps for Front Parking Assist are higher pitched than for Rear Parking Assist. Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) have the Backing Warning System, which is designed to help avoid backing crashes. The system can warn of rear objects when backing up at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). The Backing Warning System will beep once from the rear when a potential object threat is first detected, or pulse twice on both sides of the Safety Alert Seat. When the system detects a potential imminent crash, beeps will be heard from the rear, or five pulses will be felt on both sides of the Safety Alert Seat. There may also be a brief, sharp application of the brakes.

272 9-54 Driving and Operating { WARNING The Backing Warning System only operates at speeds greater than 8 km/h (5 mph). It does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. In some situations, such as at higher backing speeds, there may not be enough time for the short, sharp application of the vehicle brake system to occur. To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with the Backing Warning System, always check the area around the vehicle and check all mirrors before backing. Vehicles with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) also have the Rear Automatic Braking system, which is designed to help avoid or reduce the harm caused by backing crashes. If the system detects the vehicle is backing too fast to avoid a crash with a detected object, it may automatically brake hard to a stop. { WARNING Rear Automatic Braking may not avoid many types of backing crashes. Do not wait for the automatic braking to apply. This system is not designed to replace driver braking, but only acts when the vehicle may not stop in time. The system, in some situations or environments, may not brake or may not brake in time to avoid a crash. It does not detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, animals, or objects below the bumper or that are too close or too far from the vehicle. To prevent injury, death, or vehicle damage, even with Rear Automatic Braking, always check the area around the vehicle before and while backing. Pressing the brake pedal after the vehicle comes to a stop will release the Rear Automatic Braking. If the brake pedal is not pressed within two seconds after the stop, the electric parking brake is set. When it is safe, pressing the accelerator pedal firmly at any time will override the Rear Automatic Braking. { WARNING There may be instances where unexpected or undesired automatic braking occurs. If this happens, either press the brake pedal or firmly press the accelerator pedal to release the brakes from the Rear Automatic Braking system. Check the RVC screen and check the area around the vehicle before proceeding.

273 Driving and Operating 9-55 Turning the Features On or Off The X button to the left of the steering wheel is used to turn on or off the Front and Rear Parking Assist, Rear Automatic Braking, and Backing Warning System at the same time. The indicator light next to the button comes on when the features are on and turns off when the features have been disabled. The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) can be turned on or off through the Settings menu on the infotainment system. The parking assist symbols, guidance lines, and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) can also be turned off. To turn the RVC system, symbols, guidance lines, or RCTA on or off: 1. On the infotainment system, press the Settings screen button, or turn the MENU knob to highlight Settings and press MENU. 2. Select Rear Camera. 3. Press Rear Camera Display, Park Assist Symbols, Guidance Lines, or Rear Cross Traffic Alert and then select OFF or ON. Assistance Systems for Driving If equipped, when driving the vehicle, Forward Collision Alert (FCA), Lane Departure Warning (LDW), Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA), and/or the Active Emergency Braking System can help to avoid a crash or reduce crash damage. Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System The FCA system may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes. FCA provides a flashing alert on the windshield, and beeps or pulses the Safety Alert Seat when approaching a vehicle directly ahead too quickly. FCA also provides a visual alert if following another vehicle much too closely.

274 9-56 Driving and Operating FCA detects vehicles within a distance of approximately 60 m (197 ft) and operates at speeds above 40 km/h (25 mph). If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), it can detect vehicles to distances of approximately 110 m (360 ft) and operates at all speeds. See Adaptive Cruise Control on page { WARNING FCA is a warning system and does not apply the brakes. When approaching a slower-moving or stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly, or when following a vehicle too closely, FCA may not provide a warning with enough time to help avoid a crash. FCA does not warn of pedestrians, animals, signs, guardrails, bridges, construction barrels, or other objects. Be ready to take action and apply the brakes. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 9 3. FCA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See the Auto Collision Preparation portion of Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization on page Detecting the Vehicle Ahead FCA warnings will not occur unless the FCA system detects a vehicle ahead. The vehicle-ahead indicator will display green when a vehicle is detected in front. Vehicles may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills; or due to poor visibility. FCA will not detect another vehicle ahead until it is completely in the driving lane. { WARNING FCA does not provide a warning to help avoid a crash, unless it detects a vehicle. FCA may not detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the windshield is damaged. It may also not detect a vehicle on winding or hilly roads, or in conditions that can limit visibility such as fog, rain, or snow, or if the headlamps or windshield are not cleaned or in proper condition. Keep the windshield, headlamps, and FCA sensors clean and in good repair.

275 Driving and Operating 9-57 Collision Alert Tailgating Alert With Head-Up Display Without Head-Up Display When your vehicle approaches another vehicle too rapidly, the red lights, or the collision alert symbol on the HUD, will flash on the windshield. Either eight beeps will sound from the front, or both sides of the Safety Alert Seat will pulse five times. The vehicle-ahead indicator will display amber when you are following a vehicle ahead much too closely. Selecting the Alert Timing With Adaptive Cruise Control Without Adaptive Cruise Control Press the collision alert/following gap button on the steering wheel to set the FCA timing to Far, Medium, Near, or on some vehicles, Off. The first button press shows the current setting on the DIC. Additional button presses will change this setting. The chosen setting will remain until it is changed and will affect the timing of both the Collision Alert and the Tailgating Alert features. The timing of both alerts will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle speed, the farther away the alert will occur.

276 9-58 Driving and Operating Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing. The range of selectable alert timing may not be appropriate for all drivers and driving conditions. Changing the FCA timing setting automatically changes the following gap setting (Far, Medium, or Near) for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) feature. Unnecessary Alerts FCA may provide unnecessary alerts for turning vehicles, vehicles in other lanes, objects that are not vehicles, or shadows. These alerts are normal operation and the vehicle does not need service. Cleaning the System If the FCA system does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the camera sensor and the front of the vehicle may correct the issue. Active Emergency Braking System If the vehicle has Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) it also has the Active Emergency Braking System, which includes Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) and the Automatic Collision Preparation (ACP) System. Intelligent Brake Assist (IBA) IBA may activate when the brake pedal is applied quickly by providing a boost to braking based on the speed of approach and distance to a vehicle ahead. Minor brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal and the brake pedal should continue to be applied as needed. IBA will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased. { WARNING IBA may increase vehicle braking in situations when it may not be necessary. You could block the flow of traffic. If this occurs, take your foot off the brake pedal and then apply the brakes as needed. Automatic Collision Preparation (ACP) System ACP may help reduce crash damage by applying the vehicle s brake system and has a detection range of approximately 60 m (197 ft). Braking can only occur if a vehicle is detected ahead. This is shown by the FCA vehicle-ahead indicator being lit. See Forward Collision Alert (FCA) System on page 9 55.

277 Driving and Operating 9-59 { WARNING ACP is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on ACP to brake the vehicle. ACP may not:. Respond to stopped vehicles, pedestrians, or animals.. Detect a vehicle ahead on winding or hilly roads.. Detect a stopped or slow-moving vehicle or other object ahead.. Detect a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow. In these situations, ACP sensor performance is limited. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and/or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes. Brake Preparation When quickly approaching a vehicle ahead, Brake Preparation reduces brake response time by having the brake system prepared for driver braking to occur more rapidly. Automatic Braking Automatic Braking applies the brakes, even if the driver has not applied the brakes, in many imminent front-end crash situations to help reduce crash damage. It may even help avoid some crashes at very low speeds. Automatic Braking may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash. If this happens, Automatic Braking will engage the electric parking brake to hold the vehicle at a stop. A firm press of the accelerator pedal will release Automatic Braking. { WARNING Automatic Braking may automatically brake the vehicle in situations where it may be unnecessary. It could respond to a turning vehicle ahead, guardrails, signs, and other non-moving objects. This could be uncomfortable and startling. To override Automatic Braking, firmly press the accelerator pedal, if it is safe to do so. Automatic Braking can be disabled or reduced through vehicle personalization. See the Auto Collision Preparation portion of Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization on page 5 43.

278 9-60 Driving and Operating { WARNING Using the Automatic Collision Preparation System while towing a trailer could cause you to lose control of the vehicle and crash. Turn the system off when towing a trailer. Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) If available, the Side Blind Zone Alert system is a lane-changing aid that assists drivers with avoiding crashes that occur with vehicles in the side blind zone (or spot) areas. { WARNING SBZA does not detect vehicles rapidly approaching outside of the side blind zones, pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Failure to use proper care when changing (Continued) WARNING (Continued) lanes may result in injury, death, or vehicle damage. Before making a lane change, always check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals. SBZA Detection Zones The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, or 3.5 m (11 ft). This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back approximately 5 m (16 ft). The height of the zone is approximately between 0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2 m (6 ft) off the ground. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer, as the SBZA detection zones that extend back from the side of the vehicle do not move further back when a trailer is towed. How the System Works The SBZA symbol lights up in the side mirrors when the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone, indicating it may be unsafe to change lanes. Before making a lane change, check the SBZA display, check mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signals.

279 Driving and Operating 9-61 Left Side Mirror Display Right Side Mirror Display When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror SBZA displays will briefly come on to indicate the system is operating. When the vehicle is moving forward, the leftor right-side mirror display will light up if a vehicle is detected in that blind zone. If the turn signal is activated and a vehicle is also detected on the same side, the display will flash as an extra warning not to change lanes. SBZA displays may come on when a passed vehicle remains in or drops back into the detection zone. SBZA can be disabled through vehicle personalization. See Collision/Detection Systems under Vehicle Personalization on page If SBZA is disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays will not light up. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly SBZA may not always alert the driver to vehicles in the blind zone, especially in wet conditions. The system does not need to be serviced. The system may light up due to guardrails, signs, trees, shrubs, and other non-moving objects. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service. SBZA may not operate when the SBZA sensors in the left or right corners of the rear bumper are covered with mud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush, or in heavy rainstorms. For cleaning instructions, see "Washing the Vehicle" under Exterior Care on page If the DIC still displays the SIDE DETECTION SYSTEM UNAVAILABLE message after cleaning the rear bumper corners, see your dealer. If the SBZA displays do not light up when vehicles are in the blind zone and the system is clean, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer. When SBZA is disabled for any reason other than the driver turning it off, the Side Blind Zone Alert On option will not be available on the personalization menu.

280 9-62 Driving and Operating FCC Information See Radio Frequency Statement on page for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules and Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) LDW may help avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. It may provide a warning if the vehicle is crossing a lane without using a turn signal. LDW uses a camera sensor to detect the lane markings. It only operates at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or greater. When the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking, the LDW indicator will flash and either three beeps will be sounded from the left or right, or three Safety Alert Seat pulses will occur on the left or right side of the seat, depending on the lane departure direction. LDW will not warn if the turn signal is on or if a sharp maneuver is made. { WARNING The LDW system is an aid to help the vehicle stay in the driving lane. It does not steer the vehicle. The LDW system may not:. Provide enough time to avoid a crash.. Detect lane markings under bad weather conditions or if the windshield is dirty.. Detect lane markings and will not detect road edges.. Warn that the vehicle is crossing a lane marking if the system does not detect the lane marking. If LDW only detects lane markings on one side of the road, it will only warn you when (Continued) WARNING (Continued) departing the lane on the side where it has detected a lane marker. Even with LDW, always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, or vehicle damage, injury, or death could occur. Always keep the windshield clean and do not use LDW in bad weather conditions. How the System Works The LDW camera sensor is on the windshield ahead of the rearview mirror. To turn LDW on and off, to the left of the steering wheel. The control indicator will light when LDW is on.

281 Driving and Operating 9-63 When the vehicle is started, the LDW indicator on the instrument cluster will come on briefly. If LDW is on, the LDW indicator will appear green if the system detects a left or right lane marking while the vehicle is traveling at 56 km/h (35 mph) or greater. If the vehicle crosses a detected lane marking without using the turn signal, this indicator will change to amber and flash. In addition, three beeps will sound from the left or right, or the Safety Alert Seat will pulse three times on either the left or right side of the seat, depending on the lane departure direction. When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the system is on and the vehicle is travelling 56 km/h (35 mph) or greater, and LDW symbol does not appear:. The lane markings on the road may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be damaged.. The weather may be limiting visibility. This is normal operation; the vehicle does not need service. Clean the windshield. Lane markings may not be detected on curves, highway exit ramps, or hills; or due to poor visibility. If the LDW camera system does not seem to operate properly, cleaning the outside of the windshield in front of the camera sensor may correct the issue. { WARNING If the LDW camera sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the headlamps are not cleaned or properly aimed, or if the windshield is dirty or damaged, it may not detect the lanes ahead. LDW may not help avoid a crash under these conditions. Keep the headlamps cleaned and properly aimed and the windshield clean. LDW warnings may occur due to tar marks, shadows, cracks in the road, or other road imperfections. This is normal system operation; the vehicle does not need service.

282 9-64 Driving and Operating Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at TOP TIER gasoline is only available in the U.S. and Canada. The eighth digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) shows the code letter or number that identifies the vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on page Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page Recommended Fuel If the vehicle has a 2.5L L4 engine or a 3.6L V6 engine, use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service. If the vehicle has the 2.0L L4 engine, use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle's acceleration could be slightly reduced, and a slight audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard. If the octane is less than 87, a heavy knocking noise might be heard when driving.

283 Driving and Operating 9-65 If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Fuel Additives on page California Fuel Requirements If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California specifications. See the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting California Emissions Standards, the vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Fuels in Foreign Countries If planning to drive in countries outside the U.S. or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard to find. Check regional auto club or fuel retail brand websites for availability in the country where driving. Never use leaded gasoline, fuel containing methanol, or any other fuel not recommended. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Fuel Additives To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing the emission control system to work properly. In most cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.

284 9-66 Driving and Operating However, some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean and avoid problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards developed by the auto companies. A list of marketers providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found at For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is the only gasoline additive recommended by General Motors. It is available at your dealer. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 15% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty. Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reduce spark plug life and affect emission control system performance. The malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs, return to your dealer for service. Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) Vehicles that have a yellow fuel cap can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). For all other vehicles, use only the unleaded gasoline described under Recommended Fuel on page 9 64.

285 Driving and Operating 9-67 We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a renewable fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops. Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website ( locator/stations/) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798 or CGSB Specification Filling the tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM or CGSB specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors should supply winter grade ethanol, the same as with unleaded gasoline. The starting characteristics of E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when temperatures fall below 18 C (0 F). In the range of 18 C (0 F) to 0 C (32 F), it may take more time to start the engine. E85 has less energy per liter (gallon) than gasoline, so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the Tank on page Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty.

286 9-68 Driving and Operating Filling the Tank { WARNING Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn violently and can cause injury or death.. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island.. Turn off the engine when refueling.. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended.. Do not reenter the vehicle while pumping fuel.. Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). Fuel can spray out if the fuel cap is opened too quickly. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop then unscrew the cap all the way The cap is behind a locking fuel door on the passenger side of the vehicle. To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open. To remove the tethered fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. If the fuel cap is not installed properly, a message will appear on the Driver Information Center display. See Fuel System Messages on page When reinstalling the cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks once, otherwise the malfunction indicator lamp could turn on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the

287 Driving and Operating 9-69 nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Exterior Care on page When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks once. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page { WARNING If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Notice: If a new fuel cap is needed, be sure to get the right type of cap from your dealer. The wrong type of fuel cap might not fit properly, might cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light, and could damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page Filling a Portable Fuel Container { WARNING Filling a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle can cause fuel vapors that can ignite either by static electricity or other means. You or others could be badly burned and the vehicle could be damaged. Always:. Use approved fuel containers.. Remove the container from the vehicle, trunk, or pickup bed before filling.. Place the container on the ground. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). Place the nozzle inside the fill opening of the container before dispensing fuel, and keep it in contact with the fill opening until filling is complete.. Fill the container no more than 95% full to allow for expansion.. Do not smoke, light matches, or use lighters while pumping fuel.. Avoid using cell phones or other electronic devices.

288 9-70 Driving and Operating Towing General Towing Information Only use towing equipment that has been designed for the vehicle. Contact your dealer or trailering dealer for assistance with preparing the vehicle for towing a trailer. Read the entire section before towing a trailer. For towing a disabled vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on page For towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing on page Driving Characteristics and Towing Tips Driving with a Trailer When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state and local laws that apply to trailer towing.. Do not tow a trailer during the first km (1500 mi) to prevent damage to the engine, axle, or other parts.. Then during the first 800 km (500 mi) of trailer towing, do not drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) and do not make starts at full throttle.. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/ or hilly conditions.. Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control when towing.. The Automatic Collision Preparation System should be set to Off when towing. See Active Emergency Braking System on page { WARNING When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open. When towing a trailer:. Do not drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open.. Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel.. Also adjust the climate control system to a setting that brings in only outside air. See Climate Control System in the Index. For more information about Carbon Monoxide, see Engine Exhaust on page 9 24.

289 Driving and Operating 9-71 Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. The combination you are driving is longer and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get acquainted with the handling and braking of the rig before setting out for the open road. Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires, and mirrors. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the combination moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes work. During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure and the lamps and any trailer brakes still work. Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer. The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Making Turns Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering. When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance. If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn out, the arrows on the instrument cluster will still flash for turns. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving on Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might get hot and no longer work well. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

290 9-72 Driving and Operating When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine Overheating on page Parking on Hills { WARNING Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both (Continued) WARNING (Continued) the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface. If parking the rig on a hill: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traffic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). 5. Release the brake pedal. Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the engine. 3. Shift into a gear. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Let up on the brake pedal. 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance when Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See Maintenance Schedule on page Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system, and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.

291 Driving and Operating 9-73 Trailer Towing (With V6 Engine) Before pulling a trailer, there are three important considerations that have to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your vehicle's tires. Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It should never weigh more than 454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that can be too heavy. It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature, and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See Weight of the Trailer Tongue later in this section. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional equipment, passengers, and cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight. Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices (U.S. and Canada) on page 13 4 or Customer Assistance Offices (Mexico) on page Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (1) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers, or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See Vehicle Load Limits on page The trailer tongue (1) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (2).

292 9-74 Driving and Operating After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Total Weight on Your Vehicle's Tires Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue. Trailer Towing (With L4 Engine) The vehicle is neither designed nor intended to tow a trailer. Towing Equipment Hitches Use the correct hitch equipment. See your dealer or a hitch dealer for assistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.. Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If the holes are not sealed, dirt, water, and deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from the exhaust can get into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Leave enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground. Trailer Brakes Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted, and maintained properly. Because the vehicle has antilock brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's brake system. If this is done, both brake systems will not work well, or at all.

293 Driving and Operating 9-75 Conversions and Add-Ons Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle or cause components to not work and would not be covered by the warranty. Always check with your dealer before adding electrical equipment. Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the vehicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 31 and Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 31.

294 9-76 Driving and Operating 2 NOTES

295 Vehicle Care General Information General Information California Proposition 65 Warning California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Accessories and Modifications Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work Hood Engine Compartment Overview Engine Oil Engine Oil Life System Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission Fluid Hydraulic Clutch Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Cooling System Engine Coolant Engine Overheating Washer Fluid Brakes Brake Fluid Battery All-Wheel Drive Starter Switch Check Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check Ignition Transmission Lock Check Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield Replacement Headlamp Aiming Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Bulb Replacement Halogen Bulbs High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting LED Lighting Back-Up Lamps License Plate Lamp Replacement Bulbs Vehicle Care 10-1 Electrical System Electrical System Overload Fuses and Circuit Breakers Engine Compartment Fuse Block Instrument Panel Fuse Block Rear Compartment Fuse Block Wheels and Tires Tires All-Season Tires Winter Tires Run-Flat Tires Summer Tires Tire Sidewall Labeling Tire Designations Tire Terminology and Definitions Tire Pressure Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation Tire Pressure Monitor System Tire Pressure Monitor Operation

296 10-2 Vehicle Care Tire Inspection Tire Rotation When It Is Time for New Tires Buying New Tires Different Size Tires and Wheels Uniform Tire Quality Grading Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance Wheel Replacement Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Jump Starting Jump Starting Towing Towing the Vehicle Recreational Vehicle Towing Appearance Care Exterior Care Interior Care Floor Mats General Information For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

297 California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, safety belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see perchlorate. Accessories and Modifications Adding non dealer accessories or making modifications to the vehicle can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. These accessories or modifications could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Vehicle Care 10-3 Damage to vehicle components resulting from modifications or the installation or use of non GM certified parts, including control module or software modifications, is not covered under the terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining warranty coverage for affected parts. GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. See your dealer to accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM Accessories installed by a dealer technician. Also, see Adding Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 3 31.

298 10-4 Vehicle Care Vehicle Checks Doing Your Own Service Work { WARNING It can be dangerous to work on your vehicle if you do not have the proper knowledge, service manual, tools, or parts. Always follow owner manual procedures and consult the service manual for your vehicle before doing any service work. If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Records on page Notice: Even small amounts of contamination can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

299 Vehicle Care 10-5 Hood To open the hood: To close the hood: Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on properly. Then, bring the hood from full open to within 152 mm (6 in) of the closed position. Pause, then push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood. 1. Pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle. It is on the lower left side of the instrument panel. 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and move the secondary hood release lever toward the right side of the vehicle. 3. Lift the hood.

300 10-6 Vehicle Care Engine Compartment Overview 2.0L L4 Engine

301 Vehicle Care Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on page Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Battery on page Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View). See Cooling System on page Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page and Hydraulic Clutch on page

302 10-8 Vehicle Care 2.5L L4 Engine

303 Vehicle Care Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on page Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Battery on page Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System on page Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page and Hydraulic Clutch on page

304 10-10 Vehicle Care 3.6L V6 Engine

305 Vehicle Care Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on page Positive (+) Battery Terminal. See Battery on page Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View). See Cooling System on page Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page and Hydraulic Clutch on page Engine Oil To ensure proper engine performance and long life, careful attention must be paid to engine oil. Following these simple, but important steps will help protect your investment:. Always use engine oil approved to the proper specification and of the proper viscosity grade. See Selecting the Right Engine Oil in this section.. Check the engine oil level regularly and maintain the proper oil level. See Checking Engine Oil and When to Add Engine Oil in this section.. Change the engine oil at the appropriate time. See Engine Oil Life System on page Always dispose of engine oil properly. See What to Do with Used Oil in this section. Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1. If the engine has been running recently, turn off the engine and allow several minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. Checking the oil level too soon after engine shutoff will not provide an accurate oil level reading. { WARNING The engine oil dipstick handle may be hot; it could burn you. Use a towel or glove to touch the dipstick handle.

306 10-12 Vehicle Care 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil and then recheck the level. See Selecting the Right Engine Oil in this section for an explanation of what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page Notice: Do not add too much oil. Oil levels above or below the acceptable operating range shown on the dipstick are harmful to the engine. If you find that you have an oil level above the operating range, i.e., the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. You should drain out the excess oil or limit driving of the vehicle and seek a service professional to remove the excess amount of oil. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through. Selecting the Right Engine Oil Selecting the right engine oil depends on both the proper oil specification and viscosity grade. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page Specification Use and ask for licensed engine oils with the dexos1 approved certification mark. Engine oils meeting the requirements for the vehicle should have the dexos1 approved certification mark. This certification mark indicates that the oil has been approved to the dexos1 specification. Notice: Failure to use the recommended engine oil or equivalent can result in engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Check with your dealer or service provider on whether the oil is approved to the dexos1 specification. Viscosity Grade SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity grade for the 2.0L L4 engine and the 3.6L V6 engine. SAE 5W-20 is the best viscosity grade for the 2.5L L4 engine. Do not use other viscosity grade oils such as SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50.

307 Vehicle Care Cold Temperature Operation: In an area of extreme cold, where the temperature falls below 29 C ( 20 F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be used. An oil of this viscosity grade will provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low temperatures. When selecting an oil of the appropriate viscosity grade, always select an oil of the correct specification. See Specification earlier in this section for more information. Engine Oil Additives/Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the dexos specification and displaying the dexos certification mark are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. What to Do with Used Oil Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's warnings about the use and disposal of oil products. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in the trash or pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil. Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on a combination of factors which include engine revolutions, engine temperature, and miles driven. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed.

308 10-14 Vehicle Care When the system has calculated that oil life has been diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on. See Engine Oil Messages on page Change the oil as soon as possible within the next km (600 mi). It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system might indicate that an oil change is not necessary for up to a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer has trained service people who will perform this work and reset the system. It is also important to check the oil regularly over the course of an oil drain interval and keep it at the proper level. If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be changed at km (3,000 mi) since the last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System Reset the system whenever the engine oil is changed so that the system can calculate the next engine oil change. To reset the system: 1. Using the DIC controls on the right side of the steering wheel, display REMAINING OIL LIFE on the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page When remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display. See Engine Oil Messages on page Press SEL on the DIC controls and hold SEL down for a few seconds to clear the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message and reset the oil life at 100%. Be careful not to reset the oil life display accidentally at any time other than after the oil is changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. The oil life system can also be reset as follows: 1. Turn the ignition on with the engine off. 2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three times within five seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message is not on, the system is reset. The system is reset when the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message is off.

309 Vehicle Care If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes back on when the vehicle is started, the engine oil life system has not been reset. Repeat the procedure. Automatic Transmission Fluid How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible. The vehicle is not equipped with a transmission fluid level dipstick. There is a special procedure for checking and changing the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is difficult, this should be done at the dealer. Contact the dealer for additional information. Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in Maintenance Schedule on page 11 3, and be sure to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page Manual Transmission Fluid How to Check Manual Transmission Fluid It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it repaired as soon as possible. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page for the proper fluid to use. Hydraulic Clutch For vehicles with a manual transmission, it is not necessary to regularly check brake/clutch fluid unless there is a leak suspected. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. When to Check and What to Use The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid reservoir cap has either a symbol or text specifying the type of brake fluid. The common brake/clutch fluid reservoir is filled with GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for reservoir location.

310 10-16 Vehicle Care How to Check and Add Fluid Visually check the brake/clutch fluid reservoir to make sure the fluid level is at the MIN (minimum) line on the side of the reservoir. The brake/ hydraulic clutch fluid system should be closed and sealed. Do not remove the cap to check the fluid level or to top off the fluid level. Remove the cap only when necessary to add the proper fluid until the level reaches the MIN line. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine compartment on the driver side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for location. When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenance intervals. See Maintenance Schedule on page If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the engine air cleaner/ filter, remove the filter from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains covered with dirt, a new filter is required. To inspect or replace the air cleaner/ filter: 2.0L L4 LTG Engine Shown, 2.5L L4 LCV Engine, and 3.6L V6 LFX Engine Similar 1. Remove the four screws and lift the cover out of the assembly. 2. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 3. Lower the cover and secure with the four screws. See Maintenance Schedule on page 11 3 for replacement intervals.

311 Vehicle Care { WARNING Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off. Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt can easily get into the engine, which could damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving. Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature. 2.0L L4 LTG Engine 1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap 2. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of View) 2.5L L4 LCV Engine 1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap 2. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View)

312 10-18 Vehicle Care 3.6L V6 LFX Engine 1. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap 2. Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View) { WARNING An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { WARNING Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX COOL can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may require changing sooner, at the first maintenance service after each 30,000 miles ( km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX COOL (silicate free) coolant in the vehicle. Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL engine coolant. See Maintenance Schedule on page 11 3 and Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page What to Use { WARNING Adding only plain water or some other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong (Continued)

313 Vehicle Care WARNING (Continued) mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down to 37 C ( 34 F), outside temperature.. Gives boiling protection up to 129 C (265 F), engine temperature.. Protects against rust and corrosion.. Will not damage aluminum parts.. Helps keep the proper engine temperature. Notice: If improper coolant mixture, inhibitors, or additives are used in the vehicle cooling system, the engine could overheat and be damaged. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack engine cooling parts. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Use only the proper mixture of engine coolant for the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page Never dispose of engine coolant by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, or into sewers, streams, or bodies of water. Have the coolant changed by an authorized service center, familiar with legal requirements regarding used coolant disposal. This will help protect the environment and your health. Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level. It is normal to see coolant moving in the upper coolant hose return line when the engine is running. It is also normal to see bubbles entering the surge tank through the small hose. Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.

314 10-20 Vehicle Care If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add coolant as follows: How to Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged. If no problem is found, check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at the bottom of the fill neck, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. { WARNING Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge tank pressure cap to cool. { WARNING Adding only plain water or some other liquid to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water and other liquids, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine (Continued) WARNING (Continued) could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL coolant. Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts. Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture. { WARNING You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.

315 Vehicle Care Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap from the top chamber when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure still left to be vented out the discharge hose. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it. Open the surge tank service port cap to the lower chamber 3. Fill the surge tank top chamber with the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture to the bottom of the fill neck. The top chamber needs to be completely full. Fill the surge tank bottom chamber through the service port to approximately half. 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off and the surge tank service port cap open, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank top chamber may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL coolant mixture to the surge tank top chamber until the level reaches the bottom of the fill neck. 5. Replace the surge tank pressure cap tightly and close the surge tank service port cap. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Check the level in the surge tank top and bottom chambers when the cooling system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the proper levels, repeat Steps 1 3 and reinstall the pressure cap and close the service port. If the coolant still is not at the proper levels when the system cools down again, see your dealer.

316 10-22 Vehicle Care Engine Overheating The vehicle has an indicator to warn of the engine overheating. If the decision is made not to lift the hood when this warning appears, get service help right away. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page If the decision is made to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. Then check to see if the engine cooling fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is not, do not continue to run the engine. Have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Running the engine without coolant may cause damage or a fire. Vehicle damage would not be covered by the warranty. If Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment { WARNING Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when the engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. If No Steam Is Coming from the Engine Compartment If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic. If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam: 1. Turn the air conditioning off. 2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as necessary. 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission or Neutral for a manual transmission while stopped.

317 Vehicle Care If it is safe to do so, pull off the road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) for an automatic transmission or Neutral for a manual transmission, and let the engine idle. If the overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the vehicle in front. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away. If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Washer Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid is needed, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. If operating the vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Adding Washer Fluid Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for reservoir location. Notice. When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer instructions for adding water.. Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage the washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system.. Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.. Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the windshield washer. It can damage the windshield washer system and paint.

318 10-24 Vehicle Care Brakes This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly. { WARNING The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to a crash. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes. Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque specifications in Capacities and Specifications on page Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets. Brake Pedal Travel See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be required. Brake Adjustment Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear. Replacing Brake System Parts The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts. When parts of the braking system are replaced, be sure to get new, approved replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might not work properly. For example, installing disc brake pads that are wrong for the vehicle, can change the balance between the front and rear brakes for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed.

319 Brake Fluid The brake/clutch master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir cap. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 10 6 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down:. The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up.. A fluid leak in the brake/clutch hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake linings are installed. Add or remove fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system. { WARNING If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and the vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system. Vehicle Care Checking Brake Fluid The brake/clutch fluid can be checked without taking off the cap by looking at the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have the brake/ clutch hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake/ clutch hydraulic system, make sure the level is above MIN but not over the MAX mark. When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a low level, the brake warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning Light on page What to Add Use only new GM approved DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page

320 10-26 Vehicle Care Always clean the brake/clutch fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir. { WARNING With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake/clutch hydraulic system, the brakes might not work well. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake/clutch fluid. Notice. Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake/clutch hydraulic system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.. If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. Battery The battery is in the trunk, beneath the trim panel, on the driver side of the vehicle. Refer to the replacement number shown on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. { WARNING Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. After a power loss, such as disconnecting the battery or removing the maxi fuses in the power distribution fuse block, the following steps must be performed to calibrate the electronic throttle control. If this is not done, the engine will not run properly. 1. Turn the ignition on but do not start the engine. 2. Leave the ignition on for at least three minutes so that the electronic throttle control will cycle and relearn its home position. 3. Turn the ignition off. 4. Start and run the engine for at least 30 seconds.

321 Vehicle Storage { WARNING Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative ( ) cable from the battery to keep the battery from running down. Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative ( ) cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger. All-Wheel Drive If the vehicle is equipped with All-Wheel-Drive (AWD), this is an additional system that needs lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case fluid unless a leak is suspected or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. Vehicle Care How to Check Lubricant 1. Fill Plug 2. Drain Plug

322 10-28 Vehicle Care To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole, on the transfer case, some lubricant will need to be added. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the fill plug. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page Starter Switch Check { WARNING When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer for service. For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer for service.

323 Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check { WARNING When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move. 3. With the engine off, turn the ignition on, but do not start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service. Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.. The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park).. With the key access ignition system, the ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. See Ignition Positions on page Contact your dealer if service is required. Vehicle Care Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check { WARNING When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.. To check the parking brake's holding ability: With the engine running and the transmission in N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

324 10-30 Vehicle Care. To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake. Contact your dealer if service is required. Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear and cracking. See Maintenance Schedule on page Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. For proper type and length, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page To replace the windshield wiper blade: 1. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the windshield. 2. Lift up on the latch in the middle of the wiper blade where the wiper arm attaches. 3. With the latch open, pull the wiper blade down toward the windshield far enough to release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm. 4. Remove the wiper blade. Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield when no wiper blade is installed could damage the windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield. 5. Reverse Steps 1 3 for wiper blade replacement. Windshield Replacement The windshield is part of the HUD system. If the vehicle has to have the windshield replaced, get one that is designed for HUD or the HUD image may look out of focus.

325 Headlamp Aiming Headlamp aim has been preset and should need no further adjustment. If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the headlamp aim may be affected. If adjustment to the headlamps is necessary, see your dealer. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer. Halogen Bulbs { WARNING Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. Vehicle Care High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lighting { WARNING The high intensity discharge lighting system operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service any of the system components, you could be seriously injured. Have your dealer or a qualified technician service them. After an HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, the beam might be a slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal. LED Lighting This vehicle has several LED lamps. For replacement of any LED lighting assembly, contact your dealer.

326 10-32 Vehicle Care Back-Up Lamps 4. Install the new bulb in the bulb socket. 5. Install the bulb socket by turning clockwise. License Plate Lamp 1. Back-Up Bulb Socket 2. Back-Up Lamp Assembly To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Reach under the rear fascia and locate the back-up lamp assembly. 2. Remove the bulb socket (1) by turning counterclockwise and pulling straight out of the lamp assembly (2). 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Lamp Assembly Bulb Assembly 1. Bulb Socket 2. Bulb 3. Lamp Assembly To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Push the lamp assembly (3) toward the center of the vehicle. 2. Pull the lamp assembly down to remove. 3. Turn the bulb socket (1) counterclockwise to remove it from the lamp assembly (3).

327 Vehicle Care Pull the bulb (2) straight out of the bulb socket (1). 5. Push the replacement bulb straight into the bulb socket and turn the bulb socket clockwise to install it into the lamp assembly. 6. Push the lamp assembly back into position until the release tab locks into place. Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back-Up Lamp 921 (W16W) License Plate Lamp W5W LL For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your dealer. Electrical System Electrical System Overload The vehicle has fuses and circuit breakers to protect against an electrical system overload. When the current electrical load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the current load returns to normal or the problem is fixed. This greatly reduces the chance of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical problems. Fuses and circuit breakers protect power devices in the vehicle. Replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. If there is a problem on the road and a fuse needs to be replaced, the same amperage fuse can be borrowed. Choose some feature of the vehicle that is not needed to use and replace it as soon as possible. Headlamp Wiring An electrical overload may cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off. Have the headlamp wiring checked right away if the lamps go on and off or remain off. Windshield Wipers If the wiper motor overheats due to heavy snow or ice, the windshield wipers will stop until the motor cools and will then restart. Although the circuit is protected from electrical overload, overload due to heavy snow or ice may cause wiper linkage damage. Always clear ice and heavy snow from the windshield before using the windshield wipers. If the overload is caused by an electrical problem and not snow or ice, be sure to get it fixed.

328 10-34 Vehicle Care Fuses and Circuit Breakers The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems. To check a fuse, look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating. Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out. Replace the fuse as soon as possible. To identify and check fuses, circuit breakers, and relays, see Engine Compartment Fuse Block on page 10 34, Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 10 37, and Rear Compartment Fuse Block on page Engine Compartment Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is on the passenger side of the engine compartment. Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

329 Vehicle Care Number Usage 1 Not Used 2 Not Used 3 Not Used 4 Body Control Module 6 5 Not Used 6 Driver Power Seat 7 Not Used *8 Headlamp Washer Relay 9 Not Used 10 Not Used 11 Not Used 12 Not Used 13 Passenger Power Seat 14 Body Control Module 5

330 10-36 Vehicle Care Number Usage 15 Passive Entry/ Passive Start 16 Not Used *17 Headlamp Washer 18 Not Used 19 Antilock Brake System Pump 20 Antilock Brake System Valve *21 AIR Pump 22 Not Used 23 Wiper Control Relay 24 Wiper Speed Relay 25 Engine Control Module Relay *26 AIR Pump Relay 27 Spare/Heated Seat 2 28 Body Control Module 1/Spare Number Usage *29 AFS AHL/ Pedestrian Protection 30 Passenger Window Switch 31 Body Control Module 7 32 Sunroof 33 Front Wiper 34 AOS Display/MIL Ignition 35 Rear Electrical Center Ignition 36 Spare PT Fuse 37 Oxygen Sensor 38 Ignition Coils/ Injectors 39 Ignition Coils/ Injectors/Spare 40 Engine Control Module Number Usage 41 Fuel Heater *42 AIR Solenoid Relay 43 Washer 44 Rear Washer Relay 45 Front Washer Relay 46 Not Used 47 Instrument Panel Body Ignition 48 Fuel System Control Module Ignition 49 Heated Steering Wheel *50 Steering Column Lock *51 Coolant Pump *52 Coolant Pump Relay 53 Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch

331 Vehicle Care Number Usage *54 AIR Solenoid 55 Transmission Control Module/ Spare *56 Headlamp Low Relay 57 Headlamp high Relay 58 Starter 59 Starter Relay 60 Run/Crank Relay *61 Vacuum Pump Relay 62 Air Conditioning Control Relay *63 Adaptive Headlamp Leveling *64 Left High Intensity Discharge Headlamp Number Usage *65 Right High Intensity Discharge Headlamp 66 Headlamp High Left/Right 67 Horn 68 Horn Relay 69 Cooling Fan 70 Aero Shutter 71 Transmission Control Module Ignition 72 Engine Control Module Ignition *73 Brake Vacuum Pump 74 Not Used * Optional Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block is in the end of the driver side of the instrument panel. To access the fuses, remove the end panel by gently prying with a plastic tool near each clip, beginning at the point shown.

332 10-38 Vehicle Care To install the end cover, insert the tabs on the back of the cover into the slots in the instrument panel at the points shown. Align the clips with the slots in the instrument panel, and press the cover into place. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses and relays shown. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical component on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component.

333 Vehicle Care Number Usage 1 Not Used 2 Data Link Connector 3 Not Used 4 Not Used 5 Heater, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Control 6 Electric Steering Column Lock 8 Battery 9 Heated Steering Wheel 10 Not Used 11 Logistics Shunt 1 12 SDM/AOS 13 Cluster/HUD/ICS/ Steering Wheel Controls Number Usage 14 Radio/Heater, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning 16 Not Used 17 Accessory Power Outlet 1 18 Accessory Power Outlet 2 19 Steering Wheel Controls 20 Not Used 21 Not Used 22 Logistics Shunt 2 23 Not Used 24 Not Used 25 Not Used 27 RAP Relay Number Usage 28 Front Heater, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Blower 29 Power Steering Column 30 Not Used Circuit Breakers CB7 CB26 Relays K10 K605 K609 Not Used Not Used Usage Usage RAP/Accessory Logistics Not Used

334 10-40 Vehicle Care Rear Compartment Fuse Block The rear compartment fuse block is behind a cover on the driver side of the rear compartment. The vehicle may not be equipped with all of the fuses, relays, and features shown.

335 Vehicle Care Number Usage 1 Not Used 2 Left Window 3 Body Control Module 8 4 Not Used 5 Passive Entry Passive Start Battery 1 6 Body Control Module 4 7 Heated Mirrors 8 Amplifier 9 Rear Window Defogger 10 Not Used 11 Trailer Connector 12 OnStar (If Equipped) 13 Right Window Number Usage 14 Electric Parking Brake 15 Not Used 16 Trunk Release 17 Run Relay 18 Logistics Relay 19 Logistics Fuse 20 Rear Window Defogger Relay 21 Mirror Window Module 22 Not Used 23 Canister Vent 24 Body Control Module 2 25 Rear Vision Camera 26 Not Used 27 SBZA/LDW/EOCM 28 Trailer/Sunshade Number Usage 29 Not Used 30 Semi-Active Damping System 31 Transfer Case Control Module 32 Theft Module/ Universal Garage Door Opener/Rain Sensor 33 UPA 34 Radio/DVD 35 Not Used 36 Trailer 37 Fuel Pump/Fuel System Control Module 38 Not Used 39 Not Used 40 Not Used 41 Not Used

336 10-42 Vehicle Care Number Usage 42 Memory Seat Module 43 Body Control Module 3 44 Not Used 45 Battery Regulated Voltage Control 46 Engine Control Module Battery 47 Not Used 48 Not Used 49 Trailer Module Wheels and Tires Tires Every new GM vehicle has high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. See the warranty manual for information regarding the tire warranty and where to get service. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer. { WARNING. Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). Overloading the tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. There could be a blowout and a serious crash. See Vehicle Load Limits on page Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting crash could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when the tires are cold. (Continued)

337 Vehicle Care WARNING (Continued). Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden impact such as when hitting a pothole. Keep tires at the recommended pressure.. Worn or old tires can cause a crash. If the tread is badly worn, replace them.. Replace any tires that have been damaged by impacts with potholes, curbs, etc. (Continued) WARNING (Continued). Improperly repaired tires can cause a crash. Only the dealer or an authorized tire service center should repair, replace, dismount, and mount the tires.. Do not spin the tires in excess of 56 km/h (35 mph) on slippery surfaces such as snow, mud, ice, etc. Excessive spinning may cause the tires to explode. See Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation on page for inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed driving. All-Season Tires This vehicle may come with all-season tires. These tires are designed to provide good overall performance on most road surfaces and weather conditions. Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. Original equipment all-season tires can be identified by the last two characters of this TPC code, which will be MS. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. All-season tires provide adequate performance for most winter driving conditions, but they may not offer the same level of traction or performance as winter tires on snow or ice-covered roads. See Winter Tires on page

338 10-44 Vehicle Care Winter Tires This vehicle was not, originally, equipped with winter tires. Winter tires are designed for increased traction on snow and ice-covered roads. Consider installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving on snow or ice-covered roads is expected. See your dealer for details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying New Tires on page With winter tires, there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road noise, and shorter tread life. After changing to winter tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking. If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all four wheel positions.. Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range, and speed rating as the original equipment tires. Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y, and ZR speed rated tires. If winter tires with a lower speed rating are chosen, never exceed the tire's maximum speed capability. Run-Flat Tires This vehicle, when new, may have had run-flat tires. There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment, and no place to store a tire in the vehicle. The vehicle also has a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) that indicates a loss of tire pressure in any of the tires. { WARNING If the low tire warning light displays on the instrument cluster, the handling capabilities will be reduced during severe maneuvers. Driving too fast could cause loss of control and you or others could be injured. Do not drive over 90 km/h (55 mph) when the low tire warning light is displayed. Drive cautiously and check the tire pressures as soon as possible. Run-flat tires can be driven on with no air pressure. There is no need to stop on the side of the road to change the tire. Continue driving; however, do not drive too far or too fast. Driving on the tire may not be possible if there is permanent damage. To prevent permanent damage, keep speed below 80 km/h (50 mph). With a light load the vehicle can be driven up to 100 km (60 mi); with a moderate load 80 km

339 Vehicle Care (50 mi); and a heavy load 45 km (25 mi). As soon as possible, contact the nearest authorized GM or run-flat servicing facility for inspection and repair or replacement. When driving on a deflated run-flat tire, avoid potholes and other road hazards that could damage the tire and/or wheel beyond repair. When a tire has been damaged, or driven any distance while deflated, check with an authorized run-flat tire service center to determine whether the tire can be repaired or should be replaced. To maintain the run-flat feature, all replacement tires must be run-flat tires. To locate the nearest GM or run-flat servicing facility, call Customer Assistance. The valve stems on run-flat tires have sensors that are part of the TPMS. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page These sensors contain batteries that are designed to last for 10 years under normal driving conditions. See your dealer for wheel or sensor replacement. Notice: Using liquid sealants can damage the tire valves and tire pressure monitor sensors in the run-flat tires. This damage is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use liquid sealants in run-flat tires. Summer Tires This vehicle may come with high performance summer tires. These tires have a special tread and compound that are optimized for maximum dry and wet road performance. This special tread and compound will decrease performance in cold climates, and on ice and snow. We recommend installing winter tires on the vehicle if frequent driving in cold temperatures or on snow or ice covered roads is expected. See Winter Tires on page Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into its sidewall. The examples show a typical passenger tire sidewall. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the Tire Size illustration later in this section for more detail.

340 10-46 Vehicle Care (2) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification): Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (3) DOT (Department of Transportation): The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. DOT Tire Date of Manufacture: The last four digits of the TIN indicate the tire manufactured date. The first two digits represent the week (01-52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of (4) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although only one side may have the date of manufacture. (5) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (6) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance. For more information see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page (7) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load.

341 Vehicle Care Tire Designations Tire Size The following is an example of a typical passenger vehicle tire size. (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (2) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item 3 of the illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 60 percent as high as it is wide. (4) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means belted-bias ply construction. (5) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches. (6) Service Description: These characters represent the load index and speed rating of the tire. The load index represents the load carrying capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kpa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch). Accessory Weight: The combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

342 10-48 Vehicle Care Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kpa (kilopascal) or psi (pounds per square inch) before a tire has built up heat from driving. See Tire Pressure on page Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date of production. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits on page GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front axle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kpa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

343 Vehicle Care Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight, and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load Limits on page Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the other sidewall of the tire. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. See Tire Pressure on page and Vehicle Load Limits on page Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page

344 10-50 Vehicle Care UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 68 kg (150 lb) plus the rated cargo load. See Vehicle Load Limits on page Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight. Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the vehicle capacity weight and the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. See Tire and Loading Information Label under Vehicle Load Limits on page Tire Pressure Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Neither tire underinflation nor overinflation is good. Underinflated tires, or tires that do not have enough air, can result in:. Tire overloading and overheating which could lead to a blowout.. Premature or irregular wear.. Poor handling.. Reduced fuel economy. Overinflated tires, or tires that have too much air, can result in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage from road hazards. The Tire and Loading Information label on the vehicle indicates the original equipment tires and the correct cold tire inflation pressures. The recommended pressure is the minimum air pressure needed to support the vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.

345 Vehicle Care For additional information regarding how much weight the vehicle can carry, and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Vehicle Load Limits on page How the vehicle is loaded affects vehicle handling and ride comfort. Never load the vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry. When to Check Check the tires once a month or more. How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check the tire pressure. Proper tire inflation cannot be determined by looking at the tire. Check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold, meaning the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or no more than 1.6 km (1 mi). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get the pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the inflation pressure is low, add air until the recommended pressure is reached. If the inflation pressure in high, press on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve to release air. Re check the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Return the valve caps on the valve stems to keep out dirt and moisture and prevent leaks. Tire Pressure for High-Speed Operation { WARNING Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive heat buildup and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have a crash and you or others could be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure adjustment for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high-speed operation, in excellent condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the vehicle load.

346 10-52 Vehicle Care Vehicles with P225/45R17 and 225/40R18 92V size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold inflation pressure to 280 kpa (41 psi). Vehicles with 225/40RF18 88W and 255/35RF18 90W size tires require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the vehicle at speeds of 160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Set the cold inflation pressure to 300 kpa (44 psi). Return the tires to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure when high-speed driving has ended. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 11 and Tire Pressure on page Tire Pressure Monitor System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

347 Vehicle Care When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada Standards See Radio Frequency Statement on page for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS-GEN/210/220/310. Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light on the instrument cluster. If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page A message to check the pressure in a specific tire displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC). The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed.

348 10-54 Vehicle Care For additional information and details about the DIC operation and displays see Driver Information Center (DIC) on page The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as the vehicle is driven. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure is getting low and needs to be inflated to the proper pressure. A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of the original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the tires when they are cold. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 11, for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location. Also see Tire Pressure on page The TPMS can warn about a low tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection on page 10 56, Tire Rotation on page and Tires on page Notice: Tire sealant materials are not all the same. A non-approved tire sealant could damage the TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use only the GM-approved tire sealant available through your dealer or included in the vehicle. Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page for information regarding the inflator kit materials and instructions. TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message also displays. The malfunction light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and DIC message should go off after the road tire is replaced and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See TPMS Sensor Matching Process later in this section.

349 . The TPMS sensor matching process was not done or not completed successfully after rotating the tires. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off after successfully completing the sensor matching process. See "TPMS Sensor Matching Process" later in this section.. One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully. See your dealer for service.. Replacement tires or wheels do not match the original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on page Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. If the TPMS is not functioning properly it cannot detect or signal a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on and stays on. TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. The identification code needs to be matched to a new tire/wheel position after rotating the vehicle s tires or replacing one or more of the TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor matching process should also be performed after replacing a spare tire with a road tire containing the TPMS sensor. The malfunction light and the DIC message should go off at the next ignition cycle. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, Vehicle Care using a TPMS relearn tool, in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear. See your dealer for service or to purchase a relearn tool. There are two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer, the matching process stops and must be restarted. The TPMS sensor matching process is: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. Place the vehicle power mode in ON/RUN/START. See Ignition Positions on page Make sure the Tire Pressure info display option is turned on. The info displays on the DIC can be turned on and off through the Settings menu. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 5 26.

350 10-56 Vehicle Care 4. Use the five-way DIC control on the right side of the steering wheel to scroll to the Tire Pressure screen under the DIC info page. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page Press and hold the SEL button located in the center of the five-way DIC control. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on the DIC screen. 6. Start with the driver side front tire. 7. Place the relearn tool against the tire sidewall, near the valve stem. Then press the button to activate the TPMS sensor. A horn chirp confirms that the sensor identification code has been matched to this tire and wheel position. 8. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat the procedure in Step Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 7. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off. 11. Press STOP to turn the ignition off. 12. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Tire Inspection We recommend that the tires, including the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, be inspected for signs of wear or damage at least once a month. Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or more places around the tire can be seen.. There is cord or fabric showing through the tire's rubber.. The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.. The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

351 Vehicle Care The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. Tire Rotation If the vehicle has non-directional tires, they should be rotated every km/7,500 mi. See Maintenance Schedule on page Tires are rotated to achieve a uniform wear for all tires. The first rotation is the most important. Anytime unusual wear is noticed, rotate the tires as soon as possible, check for proper tire inflation pressure, and check for damaged tires or wheels. If the unusual wear continues after the rotation, check the wheel alignment. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page and Wheel Replacement on page Directional tires should not be rotated. Each tire and wheel should be used only in the position it is in. Directional tires will have an arrow on the tire indicating the proper direction of rotation or will have left or right molded on the sidewall. Use this rotation pattern if the vehicle has different size tires on the front and rear and they are non-directional. Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to rear.

352 10-58 Vehicle Care Use this rotation pattern when rotating tires of the same size installed on all four wheel positions. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include it in the tire rotation. Adjust the front and rear tires to the recommended inflation pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label after the tires have been rotated. See Tire Pressure on page and Vehicle Load Limits on page Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page Check that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See Wheel Nut Torque under Capacities and Specifications on page { WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used; however, use a scraper or wire brush later to remove all rust or dirt. Lightly coat the center of the wheel hub with wheel bearing grease after a wheel change or tire rotation to prevent corrosion or rust build-up. Do not get grease on the flat wheel mounting surface or on the wheel nuts or bolts.

353 When It Is Time for New Tires Factors such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions affect the wear rate of the tires. Treadwear indicators are one way to tell when it is time for new tires. Treadwear indicators appear when the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) or less of tread remaining. See Tire Inspection on page and Tire Rotation on page The rubber in tires ages over time. This also applies to the spare tire, if the vehicle has one, even if it is never used. Multiple factors including temperatures, loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance affect how fast aging takes place. GM recommends that tires, including the spare if equipped, be replaced after six years, regardless of tread wear. The tire manufacturer date is the last four digits of the DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN) which is molded into one side of the tire sidewall. The first two digits represent the week (01 52) and the last two digits, the year. For example, the third week of the year 2010 would have a four-digit DOT date of Vehicle Storage Tires age when stored normally mounted on a parked vehicle. Park a vehicle that will be stored for at least a month in a cool, dry, clean area away from direct sunlight to Vehicle Care slow aging. This area should be free of grease, gasoline, or other substances that can deteriorate rubber. Parking for an extended period can cause flat spots on the tires that may result in vibrations while driving. When storing a vehicle for at least a month, remove the tires or raise the vehicle to reduce the weight from the tires. Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for the vehicle. The original equipment tires installed were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) system rating. When replacement tires are needed, GM strongly recommends buying tires with the same TPC Spec rating.

354 10-60 Vehicle Care GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of the vehicle, including brake system performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC Spec number will be followed by MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 10 45, for additional information. GM recommends replacing worn tires in complete sets of four. Uniform tread depth on all tires will help to maintain the performance of the vehicle. Braking and handling performance may be adversely affected if all the tires are not replaced at the same time. If proper rotation and maintenance have been done, all four tires should wear out at about the same time. See Tire Rotation on page for information on proper tire rotation. However, if it is necessary to replace only one axle set of worn tires, place the new tires on the rear axle. Winter tires with the same speed rating as the original equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, and ZR speed rated tires. Never exceed the winter tire's maximum speed capability when using winter tires with a lower speed rating. { WARNING Tires could explode during improper service. Attempting to mount or dismount a tire could cause injury or death. Only your dealer or authorized tire service center should mount or dismount the tires. { WARNING Mixing tires of different sizes (other than those originally installed on the vehicle), brands, or types may cause loss of control of the vehicle, resulting in a crash or other vehicle damage. Use the correct size, brand, and type of tire on all four wheels.

355 Vehicle Care { WARNING Using bias-ply tires on the vehicle may cause the wheel rim flanges to develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly and cause a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. If the vehicle tires must be replaced with a tire that does not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction (radial) as the original tires. Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-tpc Spec rated tires are installed. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page The Tire and Loading Information label indicates the original equipment tires on the vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits on page 9 11, for the label location and more information about the Tire and Loading Information label. Different Size Tires and Wheels If wheels or tires are installed that are a different size than the original equipment wheels and tires, vehicle performance, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover may be affected. If the vehicle has electronic systems such as antilock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, electronic stability control, or All-Wheel Drive, the performance of these systems can also be affected. { WARNING If different sized wheels are used, there may not be an acceptable level of performance and safety if tires not recommended for those wheels are selected. This increases the chance of a crash and serious injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire systems developed for the vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM certified technician. See Buying New Tires on page and Accessories and Modifications on page 10 3.

356 10-62 Vehicle Care Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter tires, compact spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires. While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards. All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety Requirements In Addition To These Grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade

357 Vehicle Care assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance The tires and wheels were aligned and balanced at the factory to provide the longest tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary on a regular basis. However, check the alignment if there is unusual tire wear or if the vehicle is pulling to one side or the other. If the vehicle vibrates when driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis. Wheel Replacement Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. Some aluminum wheels can be repaired. See your dealer if any of these conditions exist. Your dealer will know the kind of wheel that is needed. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors with new GM original equipment parts.

358 10-64 Vehicle Care { WARNING Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of the vehicle. Tires can lose air, and cause loss of control, causing a crash. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to the body and chassis. { WARNING Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause a crash. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can be used, however, use a scraper or wire brush to remove all rust or dirt. { WARNING Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of the wheel nuts. The wheel nuts might come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing a crash. { WARNING Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts. Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.

359 Vehicle Care Used Replacement Wheels { WARNING Replacing a wheel with a used one is dangerous. How it has been used or how far it has been driven may be unknown. It could fail suddenly and cause a crash. When replacing wheels, use a new GM original equipment wheel. Tire Chains { WARNING If the vehicle has 225/40R18, 225/40RF18, 255/35RF18, 225/35R19, or 255/30R19 size tires, do not use tire chains. There is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to (Continued) WARNING (Continued) the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause loss of control and a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for the vehicle's tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. To avoid vehicle damage, drive slow and readjust or remove the traction device if it contacts the vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. If traction devices are used, install them on the rear tires. Notice: If the vehicle is equipped with a tire size other than 225/40R18, 225/40RF18, 255/35RF18, 225/35R19, or 255/30R19, use tire chains only where legal and only when necessary. Use low profile chains that add no more than 12 mm thickness to the tire tread and inner sidewall. Use chains that are the proper size for the tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If the chains contact the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage the vehicle.

360 10-66 Vehicle Care If a Tire Goes Flat If the vehicle has run-flat tires, there is no need to stop on the side of the road to change a flat tire. See Run-Flat Tires on page { WARNING Special tools and procedures are required to service a run-flat tire. If these special tools and procedures are not used, injury or vehicle damage may occur. Always be sure the proper tools and procedures, as described in the service manual, are used. It is unusual for a tire to blow out while driving, especially if the tires are maintained properly. See Tires on page If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if there is ever a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction as used in a skid. Stop pressing the accelerator pedal and steer to straighten the vehicle. It may be very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake to a stop, well off the road, if possible. { WARNING Driving on a flat tire will cause permanent damage to the tire. Re-inflating a tire after it has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat may cause a blowout and a serious crash. Never attempt to re-inflate a tire that has been driven on while severely underinflated or flat. Have your dealer or an authorized tire service center repair or replace the flat tire as soon as possible. { WARNING Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for (Continued)

361 Vehicle Care WARNING (Continued) changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you or others could be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire. If this vehicle does not have run-flat tires and a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place, well off the road, if possible. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 2. Set the parking brake firmly. 3. Put an automatic transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission in 1 (First) or R (Reverse). 4. Turn off the ignition. 5. Inspect the flat tire. If this vehicle has a tire sealant kit and the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than 6 mm (0.25 in), the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. If the tire has a puncture less than 6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit { WARNING Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. (Continued) WARNING (Continued) It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust on page { WARNING Overinflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended pressure. Do not exceed the recommended pressure.

362 10-68 Vehicle Care { WARNING Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit, there may not be a spare tire or tire changing equipment, and on some vehicles there may not be a place to store a tire. The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in the tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor kit instructions. The kit includes: 1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Air Only)

363 Vehicle Care On/Off Button 3. Pressure Gauge 4. Pressure Deflation Button 5. Tire Sealant Canister 6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) 7. Air Only Hose (Black) 8. Power Plug 9. Canister Release Button (Under Sealant/Air Hose) Tire Sealant Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer. See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following. There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose assembly must be replaced. See Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister following. Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage. 1. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Air Only) 2. On/Off Button

364 10-70 Vehicle Care 3. Pressure Gauge 4. Pressure Deflation Button 5. Tire Sealant Canister 6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) 7. Air Only Hose (Black) 8. Power Plug 9. Canister Release Button (Under Sealant/Air Hose) When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for five minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 6. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page for other important safety warnings. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page Unwrap the sealant/air hose (6) and the power plug (8). 3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (6) onto the tire valve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight. 6. Plug the power plug (8) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets on page 5 7. If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor. 8. Press and turn the selector switch (1) counterclockwise to the Sealant + Air position.

365 Vehicle Care Press the on/off button (2) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit on. The compressor will inject sealant and air into the tire. The pressure gauge (3) will initially show a high pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only. 10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (3). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure on page The pressure gauge (3) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure is reached. Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire valve. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page Press the on/off button (2) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in the tire, therefore, Steps must be done immediately after Step 11. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 12. Unplug the power plug (8) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (6) counterclockwise to remove it from the tire valve stem. 14. Replace the tire valve stem cap. 15. Replace the sealant/air hose (6), and the power plug (8) back in their original location.

366 10-72 Vehicle Care 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate to the recommended inflation pressure, remove the maximum speed label from the sealant canister (5) and place it in a highly visible location. Do not exceed the speed on this label until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced. 17. Return the equipment to its original storage location in the vehicle. 18. Immediately drive the vehicle 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the sealant in the tire. 19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure. Refer to Steps 1 11 under Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured). If the tire pressure has fallen more than 68 kpa (10 psi) below the recommended inflation pressure, stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire. See Roadside Service (Mexico) on page 13 7 or Roadside Service (U.S. and Canada) on page If the tire pressure has not dropped more than 68 kpa (10 psi) from the recommended inflation pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. 20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and vehicle. 21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (5) and sealant/air hose (6) assembly at a local dealer or in accordance with local state codes and practices. 22. Replace with a new canister assembly available from your dealer. 23. After temporarily sealing the tire using the tire sealant and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer within 161 km (100 mi) of driving to have the tire repaired or replaced. Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured) To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only and not sealant:

367 Vehicle Care Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or Air Only) 2. On/Off Button 3. Pressure Gauge 4. Pressure Deflation Button 5. Tire Sealant Canister 6. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) 7. Air Only Hose (Black) 8. Power Plug 9. Canister Release Button (Under Sealant/Air Hose) If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 6 6. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page for other important safety warnings. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page Unwrap the air only hose (7) and the power plug (8). 3. Place the kit on the ground. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. 4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by turning it counterclockwise. 5. Attach the air only hose (7) onto the tire valve stem by turning it clockwise until it is tight. 6. Plug the power plug (8) into the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other accessory power outlets. See Power Outlets on page 5 7. If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while using the air compressor.

368 10-74 Vehicle Care 8. Press and turn the selector switch (1) clockwise to the Air Only position. 9. Press the on/off button (2) to turn the compressor on. The compressor will inflate the tire with air only. 10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure using the pressure gauge (3). The recommended inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Tire Pressure on page The pressure gauge (3) may read higher than the actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get an accurate reading. The compressor may be turned on/ off until the correct pressure is reached. If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by pressing the pressure deflation button (4) until the proper pressure reading is reached. This option is only functional when using the air only hose (7). 11. Press the on/off button (2) to turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 12. Unplug the power plug (8) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. 13. Disconnect the air only hose (7) from the tire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace the tire valve stem cap. 14. Replace the air only hose (7) and the power plug (8) and cord back in its original location. 15. Place the equipment in the original storage location in the vehicle. The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses, balls, etc.

369 Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister To remove the sealant canister: 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. 2. Press the canister release button (9). 3. Pull up and remove the canister. 4. Replace with a new canister which is available from your dealer. 5. Push the new canister into place. Storing the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit To access the tire sealant and compressor kit: 1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page Lift the cover. 3. Remove the strap. 4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit. To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the steps. Vehicle Care Jump Starting For more information about the vehicle battery, see Battery on page If the battery has run down, try to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. { WARNING Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:. They contain acid that can burn you.. They contain gas that can explode or ignite.. They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.

370 10-76 Vehicle Care Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty. Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage the vehicle. 1. Good Battery Positive Post 2. Good Battery Negative Post 3. Discharged Battery Positive Post 4. Discharged Battery Negative Grounding Point The jump start positive post (1) and negative post (2) are on the battery of the vehicle providing the jump start. The jump start positive post (3) and the negative grounding point (4) for the discharged battery are on the passenger side of the vehicle. The positive jump start connection for the discharged battery is under a red cover. Remove the cover to expose the terminal. 1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt battery with a negative ground system. Notice: Only use a vehicle that has a 12-volt system with a negative ground for jump starting. If the other vehicle does not have a 12-volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged. 2. Position the two vehicles so that they are not touching. 3. Set the parking brake firmly and put the shift lever in P (Park) with an automatic transmission, or Neutral with a manual transmission. See Shifting Into Park (Automatic Transmission) on page 9 21 with an automatic transmission, or Parking on page 9 23 with a manual transmission. Notice: If any accessories are left on or plugged in during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Whenever possible, turn off or unplug all accessories on either vehicle when jump starting the vehicle. 4. Set the ignition to OFF. Turn off all lights and accessories in both vehicles, except the hazard warning flashers if needed.

371 Vehicle Care { WARNING An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { WARNING Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, (Continued) WARNING (Continued) add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. { WARNING Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running. 5. Connect one end of the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal on the discharged battery. 6. Connect the other end of the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. 7. Connect one end of the black negative ( ) cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the good battery. 8. Connect the other end of the black negative ( ) cable to the negative ( ) grounding point for the discharged battery. 9. Start the engine in the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine at idle speed for at least four minutes. 10. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service.

372 10-78 Vehicle Care Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. Jumper Cable Removal Reverse the sequence exactly when removing the jumper cables. Towing Towing the Vehicle Notice: Incorrectly towing a disabled vehicle may cause damage. The damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not lash or hook to the chassis components including the front and rear subframes, suspension control arms and links during towing and recovery of a disabled vehicle or to secure the vehicle to a flatbed car carrier. Use the proper nylon strap harnesses around the tires to secure the flatbed car carrier. Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck could damage the vehicle. Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. Use the tow eye for towing a disabled vehicle or loading it onto a flatbed car carrier. Notice: Improper use of the tow eye can cause vehicle damage. Use caution and low speeds to prevent damage to the vehicle. Carefully open the cover in the front or rear fascia by using the small notch that conceals the tow eye socket. Install the tow eye into the socket by turning it clockwise until it stops. When the tow eye is removed, reinstall the cover with the notch in the original position. To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motor home, see Recreational Vehicle Towing in this section. Recreational Vehicle Towing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing

373 are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a device known as a dolly. Here are some important things to consider before recreational vehicle towing:. What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's recommendations.. What is the distance that will be traveled? Some vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.. Is the proper towing equipment going to be used? See your dealer or trailering professional for additional advice and equipment recommendations.. Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is prepared to be towed. Dinghy Towing Vehicle Care Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed, a dolly or a trailer should be used. If an all-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed, a trailer should be used. See Dolly Towing following for more information.

374 10-80 Vehicle Care Dolly Towing (Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) Use the following procedure to dolly tow a rear-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake (Electric) on page 9 30 or Parking Brake (Manual) on page Put the vehicle in P (Park) for an automatic transmission or in 1 (First) for a manual transmission. 5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the dolly. 6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles) Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle with any of its wheels on the ground. All-wheel-drive vehicles can only be towed with all four wheels on a trailer.

375 Appearance Care Exterior Care Locks Locks are lubricated at the factory. Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, and have the locks greased after using. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants. Washing the Vehicle To preserve the vehicle's finish, wash it often and out of direct sunlight. Notice: Do not use petroleum-based, acidic, or abrasive cleaning agents as they can damage the vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic parts. If damage occurs, it would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. Follow all manufacturer directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions, and appropriate disposal of any vehicle care product. Notice: Avoid using high-pressure washes closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of power washers exceeding 8,274 kpa (1,200 psi) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after, to remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting. Vehicle Care Finish Care Application of aftermarket clearcoat sealant/wax materials is not recommended. If painted surfaces are damaged, see your dealer to have the damage assessed and repaired. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Occasional hand waxing or mild polishing should be done to remove residue from the paint finish. See your dealer for approved cleaning products.

376 10-82 Vehicle Care Do not apply waxes or polishes to uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, decals, simulated wood, or flat paint as damage can occur. Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/ clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. To keep the paint finish looking new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible. Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Moldings Notice: Failure to clean and protect the bright metal moldings can result in a hazy white finish or pitting. This damage would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. The bright metal moldings on the vehicle are aluminum. To prevent damage always follow these cleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to the touch before applying any cleaning solution.. Use a cleaning solution approved for aluminum. Some cleaners are highly acidic or contain alkaline substances and can damage the moldings.. Always dilute a concentrated cleaner according to the manufacturer s instructions.. Do not use chrome cleaners.. Do not use cleaners that are not intended for automotive use.. Use a nonabrasive wax on the vehicle after washing to protect and extend the molding finish. Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ Lenses and Emblems Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth, and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps, lenses and emblems. Follow instructions under "Washing the Vehicle" in this section. Windshield and Wiper Blades Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner. Clean rubber blades using a lint-free cloth or paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are worn or damaged. Damage can be caused by extreme dusty conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, snow, and ice.

377 Vehicle Care Weatherstrips Apply silicone grease on weatherstrips to make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips once a year. Black marks from rubber material on painted surfaces can be removed by rubbing with a clean cloth. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page Tires Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to clean the tires. Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle. Wheels and Trim Aluminum or Chrome Use a soft, clean cloth with mild soap and water to clean the wheels. After rinsing thoroughly with clean water, dry with a soft, clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium, or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice: To avoid surface damage, do not use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Use only approved cleaners. Also, never drive a vehicle with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. Damage could occur and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Steering, Suspension, and Chassis Components Visually inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. Inspect the power steering for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks. Body Component Lubrication Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the steel fuel door hinge unless the components are plastic. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

378 10-84 Vehicle Care Underbody Maintenance Use plain water to flush dirt and debris from the vehicle's underbody. Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this. If not removed, rust and corrosion can develop. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. Finish Damage Quickly repair minor chips and scratches with touch-up materials available from your dealer to avoid corrosion. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer's body and paint shop. Chemical Paint Spotting Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted vehicle surfaces causing blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface. Interior Care To prevent dirt particle abrasions, regularly clean the vehicle's interior. Immediately remove any soils. Note that newspapers or dark garments that can transfer color to home furnishings can also permanently transfer color to the vehicle's interior. Use a soft bristle brush to remove dust from knobs and crevices on the instrument cluster. Using a mild soap solution, immediately remove hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect repellent from all interior surfaces or permanent damage may result. Your dealer may have products for cleaning the interior. Use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned to prevent permanent damage. Apply all cleaners directly to the cleaning cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly on any switches or controls. Cleaners should be removed quickly. Never allow cleaners to remain on the surface being cleaned for extended periods of time. Cleaners may contain solvents that can become concentrated in the interior. Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning the interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the doors and windows.

379 Vehicle Care To prevent damage, do not clean the interior using the following cleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other sharp object to remove a soil from any interior surface.. Never use a brush with stiff bristles.. Never rub any surface aggressively or with excessive pressure.. Do not use laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers. For liquid cleaners, use approximately 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of water. A concentrated soap solution will leave a residue that creates streaks and attracts dirt. Do not use solutions that contain strong or caustic soap.. Do not heavily saturate the upholstery when cleaning.. Do not use solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Interior Glass To clean, use a terry cloth fabric dampened with water. Wipe droplets left behind with a clean dry cloth. Commercial glass cleaners may be used, if necessary, after cleaning the interior glass with plain water. Notice: To prevent scratching, never use abrasive cleaners on automotive glass. Abrasive cleaners or aggressive cleaning may damage the rear window defogger. Notice: Cleaning the windshield with water during the first three to six months of ownership will reduce tendency to fog. Speaker Covers Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just water and mild soap. Coated Moldings Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a sponge or soft lint-free cloth dampened with water.. When heavily soiled, use warm soapy water. Fabric/Carpet/Suede Start by vacuuming the surface using a soft brush attachment. If a rotating brush attachment is being used during vacuuming, only use it on the floor carpet. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper towel. Continue blotting until no more soil can be removed.. For solid soils, remove as much as possible prior to vacuuming.

380 10-86 Vehicle Care To clean: 1. Saturate a clean lint-free colorfast cloth with water or club soda. Microfiber cloth is recommended to prevent lint transfer to the fabric or carpet. 2. Remove excess moisture by gently wringing until water does not drip from the cleaning cloth. 3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub toward the center. Fold the cleaning cloth to a clean area frequently to prevent forcing the soil in to the fabric. 4. Continue gently rubbing the soiled area until there is no longer any color transfer from the soil to the cleaning cloth. 5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild soap solution followed only by club soda or plain water. If the soil is not completely removed, it may be necessary to use a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small hidden area for colorfastness before using a commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter. If ring formation occurs, clean the entire fabric or carpet. Following the cleaning process, a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture. Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces and Vehicle Information and Radio Displays For vehicles with high gloss surfaces or vehicle displays, use a microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Before wiping the surface with the microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle brush to remove dirt that could scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to clean. Never use window cleaners or solvents. Periodically hand wash the microfiber cloth separately, using mild soap. Do not use bleach or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly and air dry before next use. Notice: Do not attach a device with a suction cup to the display. This may cause damage and would not be covered by the warranty. Instrument Panel, Leather, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces Use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with water to remove dust and loose dirt. For a more thorough cleaning, use a soft microfiber cloth dampened with a mild soap solution.

381 Vehicle Care Notice: Soaking or saturating leather, especially perforated leather, as well as other interior surfaces, may cause permanent damage. Wipe excess moisture from these surfaces after cleaning and allow them to dry naturally. Never use heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot removers. Do not use cleaners that contain silicone or wax-based products. Cleaners containing these solvents can permanently change the appearance and feel of leather or soft trim and are not recommended. Do not use cleaners that increase gloss, especially on the instrument panel. Reflected glare can decrease visibility through the windshield under certain conditions. Notice: Use of air fresheners may cause permanent damage to plastics and painted surfaces. If an air freshener comes in contact with any plastic or painted surface in the vehicle, blot immediately and clean with a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution. Damage caused by air fresheners would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Cargo Cover and Convenience Net Wash with warm water and mild detergent. Do not use chlorine bleach. Rinse with cold water, and then dry completely. Care of Safety Belts Keep belts clean and dry. { WARNING Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.

382 10-88 Vehicle Care Floor Mats { WARNING If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with the pedals. Interference with the pedals can cause unintended acceleration and/or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with the pedals. Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor mats were designed for your vehicle. If the floor mats need replacing, it is recommended that GM certified floor mats be purchased. Non-GM floor mats may not fit properly and may interfere with the pedals. Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.. Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.. Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.. Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.. Do not place one floor mat on top of another. The driver side floor mat is held in place by button-type retainers. Removing and Replacing the Floor Mats 1. Pull up on the rear of the floor mat to unlock the retainers and remove. 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor mat retainer openings over the carpet retainers and snap into position. 3. Make sure the floor mat is properly secured in place.

383 Service and Maintenance 11-1 Service and Maintenance General Information General Information Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule Special Application Services Special Application Services Additional Maintenance and Care Additional Maintenance and Care Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Maintenance Replacement Parts Maintenance Records Maintenance Records General Information Your vehicle is an important investment. This section describes the required maintenance for the vehicle. Follow this schedule to help protect against major repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance. It may also help to maintain the value of the vehicle if it is sold. It is the responsibility of the owner to have all required maintenance performed. Your dealer has trained technicians who can perform required maintenance using genuine replacement parts. They have up to date tools and equipment for fast and accurate diagnostics. Many dealers have extended evening and Saturday hours, courtesy transportation, and online scheduling to assist with service needs.

384 11-2 Service and Maintenance Your dealer recognizes the importance of providing competitively priced maintenance and repair services. With trained technicians, the dealer is the place for routine maintenance such as oil changes and tire rotations and additional maintenance items like tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper blades. Notice: Damage caused by improper maintenance can lead to costly repairs and may not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are important to keep the vehicle in good working condition. The Tire Rotation and Required Services are the responsibility of the vehicle owner. It is recommended to have your dealer perform these services every km/7,500 mi. Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces vehicle emissions. Because of the way people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary. There may need to be more frequent checks and services. The Additional Required Services Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on the Tire and Loading Information label. See Vehicle Load Limits on page Are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.. Use the recommended fuel. See Recommended Fuel on page Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Normal chart. The Additional Required Services Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery service. Refer to the information in the Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services Severe chart. { WARNING Performing maintenance work can be dangerous and can cause serious injury. Perform maintenance work only if the required information, proper tools, and equipment are available. If they are not, see your dealer to have a trained technician do the work. See Doing Your Own Service Work on page 10 4.

385 Service and Maintenance 11-3 Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance Your vehicle comes with the Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance. It is a maintenance program that covers select maintenance services during the first 4 years or km (50,000 mi), whichever comes first. Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance covers routine maintenance services, when scheduled in accordance with the owner manual, including:. Oil changes based on the vehicle's oil life monitor system.. Tire rotation every km (7,500 mi).. Engine air cleaner filter replacement.. Passenger compartment air filter replacement.. Multi point vehicle inspection (MPVI) performed by a qualified technician. Cadillac requires that all Cadillac Premium Care Maintenance services be performed by a Cadillac authorized service dealer. Maintenance Schedule Owner Checks and Services At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil on page Once a Month. Check the tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure on page Inspect the tires for wear. See Tire Inspection on page Check the windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid on page

386 11-4 Service and Maintenance Engine Oil Change When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, have the engine oil and filter changed within the next km/600 mi. If driven under the best conditions, the engine oil life system might not indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your trained dealer technician can perform this work. If the engine oil life system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within km/3,000 mi since the last service. Reset the oil life system when the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System on page Tire Rotation and Required Services Every km/ 7,500 mi Rotate the tires, if recommended for the vehicle, and perform the following services. See Tire Rotation on page Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. If needed, change engine oil and filter, and reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on page and Engine Oil Life System on page Check engine coolant level. See Engine Coolant on page Check windshield washer fluid level. See Washer Fluid on page Visually inspect windshield wiper blades for wear, cracking, or contamination. See Exterior Care on page Replace worn or damaged wiper blades. See Wiper Blade Replacement on page Check tire inflation pressures. See Tire Pressure on page Inspect tire wear. See Tire Inspection on page Visually check for fluid leaks.. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page Inspect brake system.

387 Service and Maintenance Visually inspect steering, suspension, and chassis components for damaged, loose, or missing parts or signs of wear. See Exterior Care on page Check restraint system components. See Safety System Check on page Visually inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.. Visually inspect exhaust system and nearby heat shields for loose or damaged parts.. Lubricate body components. See Exterior Care on page Check starter switch. See Starter Switch Check on page Check automatic transmission shift lock control function. See Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control Function Check on page Check ignition transmission lock. See Ignition Transmission Lock Check on page Check parking brake and automatic transmission park mechanism. See Park Brake and P (Park) Mechanism Check on page Check accelerator pedal for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed.. Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, cracks, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the strut. See your dealer if service is required.. Check tire sealant expiration date, if equipped. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit on page Inspect sunroof track and seal, if equipped. See Sunroof on page 2 23.

388 11-6 Service and Maintenance Additional Required Services Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal 12000km/7,500mi 24000km/15,000mi 36000km/22,500mi 48000km/30,000mi 60000km/37,500mi 72000km/45,000mi Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Check engine oil level and oil Change engine oil and filter, if needed. Replace passenger compartment air Inspect evaporative control @ Replace engine air cleaner @ Except 2.0L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. 2.0L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. Change automatic transmission fluid. Change filter if serviceable. Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with AWD. (4) Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited slip differential. Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (5) Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) Replace brake fluid. (7) 84000km/52,500mi km/67,500mi km/75,000mi km/82,500mi km/105,000mi km/112,500mi km/127,500mi km/135,000mi @

389 Service and Maintenance 11-7 Footnotes Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Normal (1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent replacement may be needed if the vehicle is driven in areas with heavy traffic, areas with poor air quality, or areas with high dust levels. Replacement may also be needed if there is a reduction in air flow, excessive window fogging, or odors. (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, if the vehicle has one. Replace as needed. (3) Or every four years, whichever comes first. (4) Do not directly power wash the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. (5) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System on page (6) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed. (7) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first.

390 11-8 Service and Maintenance Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe 12000km/7,500mi 24000km/15,000mi 36000km/22,500mi 48000km/30,000mi 60000km/37,500mi 72000km/45,000mi Rotate tires and perform Required Services. Check engine oil level and oil Change engine oil and filter, if needed. Replace passenger compartment air Inspect evaporative control @ Replace engine air cleaner @ Change automatic transmission fluid. Change filter if serviceable. Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with AWD. (4) Change rear axle fluid, if equipped with limited slip differential. Except 2.0L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. 2.0L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. Drain, flush, and fill engine cooling system. (5) Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) Replace brake fluid. (7) 84000km/52,500mi 96000km/60,000mi km/67,500mi km/75,000mi @ km/105,000mi km/112,500mi km/127,500mi km/135,000mi @

391 Service and Maintenance 11-9 Footnotes Maintenance Schedule Additional Required Services - Severe (1) Or every two years, whichever comes first. More frequent replacement may be needed if the vehicle is driven in areas with heavy traffic, areas with poor air quality, or areas with high dust levels. Replacement may also be needed if there is a reduction in air flow, excessive window fogging, or odors. (2) Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve works properly, if the vehicle has one. Replace as needed. (3) Or every four years, whichever comes first. (4) Do not directly power wash the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be replaced. (5) Or every five years, whichever comes first. See Cooling System on page (6) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Inspect for fraying, excessive cracking, or damage; replace, if needed. (7) Or every 10 years, whichever comes first. Special Application Services. Severe Commercial Use Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis components every km/3,000 mi.. Have underbody flushing service performed once a year.

392 11-10 Service and Maintenance Additional Maintenance and Care Your vehicle is an important investment and caring for it properly may help to avoid future costly repairs. To maintain vehicle performance, additional maintenance services may be required. It is recommended that your dealer perform these services their trained dealer technicians know your vehicle best. Your dealer can also perform a thorough assessment with a multi-point inspection to recommend when your vehicle may need attention. The following list is intended to explain the services and conditions to look for that may indicate services are required. Battery The battery supplies power to start the engine and operate any additional electrical accessories.. To avoid break-down or failure to start the vehicle, maintain a battery with full cranking power.. Trained dealer technicians have the diagnostic equipment to test the battery and ensure that the connections and cables are corrosion-free. Belts. Belts may need replacing if they squeak or show signs of cracking or splitting.. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the belts and recommend adjustment or replacement when necessary. Brakes Brakes stop the vehicle and are crucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include chirping, grinding, or squealing noises, or difficulty stopping.. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment to inspect the brakes and recommend quality parts engineered for the vehicle. Fluids Proper fluid levels and approved fluids protect the vehicle s systems and components. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page for GM approved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield washer fluid levels should be checked at every fuel fill.. Instrument cluster lights may come on to indicate that fluids may be low and need to be filled.

393 Service and Maintenance Hoses Hoses transport fluids and should be regularly inspected to ensure that there are no cracks or leaks. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can inspect the hoses and advise if replacement is needed. Lamps Properly working headlamps, taillamps, and brake lamps are important to see and be seen on the road.. Signs that the headlamps need attention include dimming, failure to light, cracking, or damage. The brake lamps need to be checked periodically to ensure that they light when braking.. With a multi-point inspection, your dealer can check the lamps and note any concerns. Shocks and Struts Shocks and struts help aid in control for a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include steering wheel vibration, bounce/ sway while braking, longer stopping distance, or uneven tire wear.. As part of the multi-point inspection, trained dealer technicians can visually inspect the shocks and struts for signs of leaking, blown seals, or damage, and can advise when service is needed. Tires Tires need to be properly inflated, rotated, and balanced. Maintaining the tires can save money, fuel, and can reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be replaced include three or more visible treadwear indicators; cord or fabric showing through the rubber; cracks or cuts in the tread or sidewall; or a bulge or split in the tire.. Trained dealer technicians can inspect and recommend the right tires. Your dealer can also provide tire/wheel balancing services to ensure smooth vehicle operation at all speeds. Your dealer sells and services name brand tires. Vehicle Care To help keep the vehicle looking like new, vehicle care products are available from your dealer. For information on how to clean and protect the vehicle s interior and exterior, see Interior Care on page and Exterior Care on page

394 11-12 Service and Maintenance Wheel Alignment Wheel alignment is critical for ensuring that the tires deliver optimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may need to be adjusted include pulling, improper vehicle handling, or unusual tire wear.. Your dealer has the required equipment to ensure proper wheel alignment. Windshield For safety, appearance, and the best viewing, keep the windshield clean and clear.. Signs of damage include scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can inspect the windshield and recommend proper replacement if needed. Wiper Blades Wiper blades need to be cleaned and kept in good condition to provide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking, skipping across the windshield, and worn or split rubber.. Trained dealer technicians can check the wiper blades and replace them when needed.

395 Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Usage Service and Maintenance Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See Engine Oil on page Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No , in Canada ). Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection requirements. Hydraulic Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No , in Canada ). Manual Transmission DEXRON -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Automatic Transmission DEXRON -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No , in Canada ). Rear Axle (Non-Limited Slip Gear DEXRON MTF 75W-90 (GM Part No ). Differential)

396 11-14 Service and Maintenance Usage Rear Axle (Limited Slip Differential) Fluid/Lubricant DEXRON LS Gear 75W-90 (GM Part No , in Canada ). Rear Axle (All-Wheel Drive) Gear DEXRON MTF 75W-90 (GM Part No ). Chassis Lubrication Key Lock Cylinders Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and Release Pawl Hood and Door Hinges Weatherstrip Conditioning Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No , in Canada ) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No , in Canada ). Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No , in Canada ) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB. Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No , in Canada ). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No , in Canada ) or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No , in Canada ).

397 Service and Maintenance Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer. Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter A3178C Engine Oil Filter 2.0L L4 Engine PF64 2.5L L4 Engine PF64 3.6L V6 Engine PF2129 Passenger Compartment Air Filter CF185 Spark Plugs 2.0L L4 Engine L L4 Engine L V6 Engine Wiper Blades Driver Side 55 cm (21.7 in) Passenger Side 45 cm (17.7 in)

398 11-16 Service and Maintenance Maintenance Records After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed

399 Service and Maintenance Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed

400 11-18 Service and Maintenance 2 NOTES

401 Technical Data Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Service Parts Identification Label Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications Engine Drive Belt Routing Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the left side of the vehicle. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. Technical Data 12-1 Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See Engine Specifications under Capacities and Specifications on page 12 2 for the vehicle's engine code. Service Parts Identification Label This label, on the load floor under the spare tire cover in the trunk, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special equipment. Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

402 12-2 Technical Data Vehicle Data Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page for more information. Air Conditioning Refrigerant Cooling System Engine Application Metric Capacities English For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the hood. See your dealer for more information. 2.0L L4 Engine 7.6 L 8.0 qt 2.5L L4 Engine 6.6 L 7.0 qt 3.6LV6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt Engine Oil with Filter 2.0L L4 Engine RWD 4.7 L 5.0 qt 2.0L L4 Engine AWD 5.7 L 6.0 qt 2.5L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt 3.6LV6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

403 Technical Data 12-3 Application Metric Capacities English Fuel Tank 62.5 L 16.5 gal Transfer Case AWD 0.8 L 0.8 qt Rear Axle (with limited slip) 1.0 L 1.0 qt Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 6-Speed Automatic 6.0 L 6.4 qt Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 2.0L L4 Engine X Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in) Manual 2.5L L4 Engine A Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in) 3.6L V6 Engine 3 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)

404 12-4 Technical Data Engine Drive Belt Routing 2.0L and 2.5L L4 Engines 3.6L V6 Engine